Upload
others
View
1
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
Range and Richness of VascularLand Plants:The Role of Variable Light
Peter S. Eagleson
American Geophysical UnionWashington, DC
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
Published under the aegis of the AGU Books Board
Kenneth R. Minschwaner, Chair; Gray E. Bebout, Joseph E. Borovsky, Kenneth H. Brink, RalfR. Haese, Robert B. Jackson, W. Berry Lyons, Thomas Nicholson, Andrew Nyblade, Nancy N.Rabalais, A. Surjalal Sharma, Darrell Strobel, Chunzai Wang, and Paul David Williams, members.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Eagleson, Peter S.Range and richness of vascular land plants : the role of variable
light / Peter S. Eagleson.p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and index.ISBN 978-0-87590-732-1 (alk. paper)1. Phytogeography—Climatic factors. 2. Plants—Effect of solar
radiation on. 3. Plant species diversity. I. Title.QK754.5.E17 2009581.7—dc22 2009048108
ISBN: 978-0-87590-732-1
Book doi:10.1029/061SP
Copyright 2009 by the American Geophysical Union2000 Florida Avenue, NWWashington, DC 20009
Front cover: Spong trees moving toward the light at the ruins of Ta Prohm, Cambodia. Film imagecourtesy of Beverly G. Eagleson. Digital image by James M. Long of the Massachusetts Instituteof Technology.
Figures, tables, and short excerpts may be reprinted in scientific books and journals if the source isproperly cited.
Authorization to photocopy items for internal or personal use, or the internal or personal use ofspecific clients, is granted by the American Geophysical Union for libraries and other usersregistered with the Copyright Clearance Center (CCC) Transactional Reporting Service, providedthat the base fee of $1.50 per copy plus $0.35 per page is paid directly to CCC, 222 Rosewood Dr.,Danvers, MA 01923. 978-0-87590-732-1/09/$1.50 + 0.35.
This consent does not extend to other kinds of copying, such as copying for creating new collectiveworks or for resale. The reproduction of multiple copies and the use of full articles or the useof extracts, including figures and tables, for commercial purposes requires permission from theAmerican Geophysical Union.
Printed in the United States of America
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
To my dearest Bev, who has taught me how to live and to love and, in so
doing, has inspired my work and enriched my life beyond measure
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
In Memoriam
Helen Sturges Eagleson (1900–1989), mother, binder of childhood wounds,
cultivator of intellect, supporter of ambitious dreams, guide through the minefields
of male adolescence, and setter of the standards for life, who, through continuing
personal sacrifice, single-handedly prepared her children for early and productive
independence.
Arthur Thomas Ippen (1907–1974), teacher, advisor, advocate, professional ex-
emplar, colleague, surrogate father, and dear friend, whose unfailing confidence and
support placed a Massachusetts Institute of Technology career within the author’s
grasp and whose foresight, in the early 1960s, directed that career toward develop-
ment of the neglected hydrologic sciences.
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
Ecosystem Research Needs
We lack a robust theoretical basis for linking ecological diversity to ecosystem
dynamics. . . .
Carpenter et al. [2006, p. 257]
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
Estimated global numbers of vascular land plant species: The key to analytical formulation of localspecies range and richness as a function solely of incident light lies in finding a robust one-to-one connection between species and a biologically optimum value of intercepted shortwave solarradiation. Such a connection exists at the intersection of the asymptotes of the photosynthetic-capacity curve of the leaves of C 3 vascular land plants, and this illustration demonstrates theglobal dominance of this photosynthetic pathway. Keyed letters indicate the following Websites: a, http://www.bio.umass.edu/biology/conn.river/photosyn.html; b, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bromeliaceae; c, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Orchidaceae; d, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Succulent plant; e, http://science.jrank.org/pages/6418/Spurge-Family.html; f, http://users.rcn.com/jkimball.ma.ultranet/BiologyPages/C/C4plants.html; g, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ferns; h,http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lycopodiophyta; and i, http://www.discoverlife.org/20/q?search=Bryophyta.
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
Contents
Foreword xi
Preface xiii
Acknowledgments xvii
Part I: Overview 1
Chapter 1: Introduction 3
Historical summary 3
Modeling philosophy 5
Bioclimatic basis for local community structure 7
Range 9
Richness 13
Major simplifications 14
Principal assumptions 15
Principal findings 15
Part II: Local Species Range and Richness 17
Chapter 2: Local Climate: Observations and Assessments 19
Major biomes of North America 19
Growing season 19
Solar radiation 20
Zonal homogeneity 27
Looking ahead 29
vii
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
viii R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
Chapter 3: Mean Latitudinal Range of Local Species: Prediction
Versus Observation 31
Introduction and definitions 31
Range of local mean species as determined bylocal distributions about the mean 32
Theoretical estimation of the range with climaticforcing by SW flux only 36
Range of local modal species versus mean of localspecies’ ranges 39
Probability mass of the distribution of observedlocal species 42
Analytical summary for climatic forcing by SW fluxonly 43
Point-by-point estimation of range versusobservation for North America 45
A thought experiment on the variation of SW fluxin an isotropic atmosphere 49
Range of modal species at maxima and minima ofthe SW flux 51
Gradient estimation of range versus observationfor North America 52
Point-by-point estimation of range versusobservation for the Northern Hemisphere 55
Gradient estimation of range versus observationfor the Northern Hemisphere 60
Low-latitude smoothing of range by latitudinalaveraging of the growing season 62
Range as a reflection of the bioclimatic dispersionof species 63
A high-latitude shift in bioclimatic control fromlight to heat? 65
Extension of these range forecasts by use ofmultiple forcing variables 68
A look ahead 68
Chapter 4: Richness of Local Species: Prediction Versus Observation 69
Introduction 69
From continuous to discrete distribution of localspecies 72
Local SW flux as a stationary Poisson stochasticprocess 73
Distribution of C 3 species–supporting radiationintercepted in a growing season 75
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
C O N T E N T S ix
Moments of C 3 species–supporting radiationintercepted in a growing season 77
Moments of the number of C 3 species–supportingcloud events in a growing season 78
From climatic disturbance to C 3 speciesgermination 79
Parameter estimation 80
Predicted potential richness versus observedrichness 82
The theoretical tie between range and richness 84
Part III: Recapitulation 85
Chapter 5: Summary and Conclusions 87
Precis 87
Mathematical approximations in range calculation 89
Evaluation of range prediction 90
Evaluation of richness prediction 92
Finis 93
Part IV: Appendices: Reductionist Darwinian Modeling ofthe Bioclimatic Function for C3 Plant Species 95
AppendixA: The Individual C 3 Leaf 97
Photosynthetic capacity of the C 3 leaf 97
Mass transfer from free atmosphere to chloroplasts 99
Assimilation modulation by leaf temperature andambient CO2 concentration 104
Exponential approximation to the C 3
photosynthetic capacity curve 104
Potential assimilation efficiency of C 3 leaves 105
The state of stress 107
Darwinian operating state of the individual C 3 leaf 107
The univariate bioclimatic function at leaf scale 108
AppendixB: The Homogenous C 3 Canopy 111
Idealized geometry of the leaf layer 111
Darwinian heat proposition 113
Vertical flux of radiation in a closed canopy 113
C 3 species parameters 116
Bioclimatic function at canopy scale 117
Local evolutionary equilibrium: An hypothesis 118
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
x R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
AppendixC: Evaluation of the Evolutionary Equilibrium
Hypothesis 121
The equilibrium hypothesis at leaf scale 121
The equilibrium hypothesis at local canopy scale 121
Summary 125
Notation 127
Glossary 137
Bibliography 141
Additional Reading 147
Author Index 149
Subject Index 151
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
Foreword
This immensely creative and original book addresses one of the most important
problems in evolutionary biology and ecological theory, namely, the observed
decrease of species richness with increasing latitude and the accompanying increase
of the latitudinal range of individual species. Professor Eagleson starts from the
hypothesis that climate is the key conditioning of the above two gradients and that
the answer for a theoretically solid explanation of the variability of species range and
richness may lie in their links with the spatial and temporal variability of climate. Thus
the ambitious goal of this book is to establish the bioclimatic basis of local community
structure. This is indeed a challenging objective that may resist a generally applicable
explanation to specific situations because of the infinite variety of conditions that
may affect a particular species. Recognizing this, Eagleson focuses on the magnitude
and gradient of the maximum possible local species richness: an equally challenging
goal, which if solved, will bring to light a number of patterns found embedded in
immensely complex ecological systems.
Focusing on the forests of the middle and high latitudes, whose growth is basically
limited by light, Eagleson develops a theoretical, analytical, bioclimatic explanation
of the variability of species range and richness over the midlatitudes. This book
presents a theory and framework of analysis that provides synthesis and promotes
understanding of the structure and diversity of ecological communities.
Local climate experiences fluctuations throughout time and acts as a causative
agent for a succession of optimally supported species. From a bioclimatic function
relating a key plant characteristic, the projected leaf area index, to the controlling
climate variable, shortwave radiative flux, Eagleson proceeds to derive a theoretical
prediction of the range of C3 plants as a function of latitude that agrees extremely
well with the observations available from the North America continent.
xi
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
xii R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
The maximum possible local species richness is assumed to be controlled by the
local disturbances of shortwave radiative flux, which are, in turn, estimated by Eagle-
son via the statistical structure of local cloud arrivals and their shortwave interception.
Again, the theoretical maximum thus estimated compares very well with the zonal
richness observed for C3 plants in North America.
In summary, the author provides compelling evidence that the biogeography of
plants over middle and high latitudes can be theoretically explained by the space-time
patterns of the shortwave radiative flux. Professor Eagleson’s book is a most original
and exciting monograph that comprehensively explains an extremely important and
challenging problem of ecosystem science.
The approach and style of the book is one based on the best tradition of scientific
research. The enormous complexity of the problem does not distract the author from
his goal of finding an explanation founded in solid theoretical principles. Eagleson
is not afraid of making simplifying assumptions that will then allow for analytical
constructs leading to quantitative understanding of a general type. The assumptions
are carefully stated, and the results are thoroughly tested against large amounts of
data.
Professor Eagleson has written a book whose influence will only increase with the
passage of time. This monumental work will forever change the way that ecologists,
hydrologists, climatologists, and geographers study a set of fundamental phenomena
lying at the intersection of their sciences. Researchers in all those disciplines will be
at the same time challenged and inspired by the search for quantitative explanation
and by the creativity continuously displayed throughout the book. The beauty of the
analysis is probably its greatest intellectual appeal.
Peter S. Eagleson has continuously led hydrology into new and exciting territories
throughout the last 50 years. He has eloquently said:
We need to get away from a view of hydrology as a purely physical science. Life on
earth also has to be a self-evident part of the discipline. In particular, I’m thinking of
vegetation and its powerful interactive relationship with the atmosphere, at both a local
and a global level. In attempting to get the full picture, we must not be afraid to express
the role of plants in our mathematical equations [Hanneberg, 2000].
This wonderful book is science at its best: It attempts to get the full picture and
succeeds beautifully in this effort! It is for me a privilege to introduce it to the scientific
community.
Ignacio Rodrıguez-Iturbe
James S. McDonnell Distinguished University Professor
of Civil and Environmental Engineering
Princeton University
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
Preface
This is a research monograph and not a textbook. Here I demonstrate analytically
how the observed, opposing, latitudinal gradients in the average range and richness
of local vascular land plant species are (outside the moist-tropical zone, at least) driven
primarily by the local temporal and spatial variability of shortwave radiative flux at
the canopy top. (The term “richness” as used here means the local number of different
vascular land plant species unlimited by the size of the area sampled.) The hypotheses
are simplistic but are nevertheless convincingly accurate in extratropical latitudes
when tested against observations over the continental land surfaces of the Northern
Hemisphere, the only areas tested here.
Species geographical range and local richness lie at the interface of two complex
sciences, biology and geophysics, each having its own established techniques and
traditions of analysis. A rigorous, general explanation of range and richness covering
all the many microclimates of Earth and the myriad species evolved in accommodation
thereto seems impossible at this time; the number of variables is daunting, and the
necessary observational detail is unavailable. This is, or at least was, in earlier years, a
common situation in many branches of engineering, and a variety of useful approaches
exist to deal with such complexity. We must first agree to seek a limited rather than
generalized solution; that is, ask a different and less demanding question! Here I
will then need to limit the independent variables (climate and soil variables, in this
case) to the one or two reasoned to be most important and be willing to accept
the resulting restricted accuracy and/or geographical applicability of the findings.
We shall see in chapter 1 that if the fundamental biophysical relation between the
observable independent (climate) variable(s) and the dependent (species) variable is
locally quasi-linear, then we need know neither its sense nor its true mathematical
form; we can derive an approximate probability distribution of the local species
xiii
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
xiv R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
and proceed to an approximate and restricted solution of the original problem. This
process is an example of “reductionism” (see the epigraphs on the section I, II, and
III opening pages) and forms the basis for the work described herein.
This volume contains a substantive section (section II) preceded by an overview
(section I) and followed by both a recapitulation (section III) and a set of supportive
appendixes (section IV). Because it is a research monograph rather than a textbook,
the volume more or less follows the path of discovery, describing what does not work
as well as what does, and why, for the failures are often as instructive as the successes.
Section II begins with the presentation, in chapter 2, of latitudinal distributions of
the mean, variance, and latitudinal gradient of the annual zonal SW flux at canopy
top during the growing season, for continental land surfaces in both North America
and in the entire Northern Hemisphere, as derived from NASA satellite observations
and generously prepared for use here by my longtime Massachusetts Institute of
Technology colleague and friend, Dara Entekhabi.
In chapter 3, I employ a local linearization of the bioclimatic function (derived in
the appendixes from simplified biological behaviors) relating a physical property of
separate C3 species to their saturating SW flux. This permits derivation of the standard
deviation of the local frequency distribution of species as being directly proportional
to the standard deviation of the local annual SW flux and thus, from local flux ob-
servations, to the associated “standard deviation of latitude,” as measured in degrees.
These transformations provide the scale by which to estimate local range. Latitudinal
oscillations in both the mean and variance of the observed local seasonal SW flux give
“point-by-point” predictions of range that are wildly oscillating. However, elimina-
tion of these local flux oscillations in favor of flux gradients reveals underlying linear
trends and range gradients, yielding close agreement, in both North America and the
Northern Hemisphere, with the widely referenced North American observations of
Brockman [1968] over their full span of 41◦N latitude.
Chapter 4 employs the role that ground-level SW flux variations play in both seed
germination [Pickett and White, 1985] and the follow-on stressing of the emergent
species to estimate the potential number of local species, acknowledging that the actual
number of local species will be less than the potential by virtue of that unknown
(and/or unaccounted for) myriad of special local conditions referred to earlier. I
derive this potential from local temporal variations in the pixel-scale atmospheric
interception of solar radiation (and hence in the heat) during the growing season,
when represented as a stationary time series of independent and Poisson-distributed
arrivals of cloudy periods. Assuming the total energy intercepted annually by the
random number of annual cloud events to be gamma distributed (this assumption
does not weaken the analysis substantially as the gamma distribution can represent
a variety of shapes), the shape parameter, κ , of the latter must be estimated. I do so
from existing similar analyses of local North American rainstorms and, with it, obtain
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
P R E F A C E xv
the first two moments of the cloud disturbance frequency as an inverse function of the
variance of the local annual SW flux. From these moments, I estimate the maximum
number of (assumed normally distributed) local annual stressful disturbances to be
approximated as their mean plus (at 99% probability mass) 2.5 standard deviations
therefrom. This formulation predicts quite closely the maximum envelope of the
observed number of local vascular plant species over the 48◦ of latitude in North
America encompassed by the work of Reid and Miller [1989]. The theoretical relation
of local range to local richness is found to be inverse through the derived nature of their
separate dependencies on the variance of local annual SW flux, thereby corroborating
the observation of Rapoport [1975].
Chapter 5 presents a set of paired summaries of the major issues considered along
with the associated conclusions derived herein, plus mention of a few promising
related, but unresolved, problems.
The appendixes are devoted to reductionist modeling of the bioclimatic process by
which radiation drives the conversion of carbon dioxide into solid plant matter. Be-
cause of their predominance, at least in the humid and shady habitats [e.g., Ehleringer
and Cerling, 2002], I consider only vascular plants having the C3 photosynthetic
pathway and examine their behavior at two scales: individual leaf (Appendix A) and
homogeneous canopy (Appendix B). It is in Appendix A that I draw heavily on my
previous hypotheses [Eagleson, 2002]. There I (1) review the generalized geometry
of the classic leaf-scale C3 photosynthetic capacity curve, (2) identify the principal
species variable to be the projected leaf area index and the principal climatic forcing
to be incident SW radiation, and (3) arrive at a generalized bioclimatic function at
leaf scale that relates local C3 species to average local incident SW radiation in the
growing season such as to maximize unstressed productivity. Appendix B expands
the leaf-scale development to the full homogeneous canopy.
In Appendix C, I find and verify, using a small sample of data from the literature,
that the leaf-scale bioclimatic function is applicable across both of the considered
scales, provided that the CO2 supply and demand are both maximized and equal.
I call this the “evolutionary equilibrium hypothesis” and suggest it as a possible
quantification (only for the case of C3 plants, of course) of so-called punctuated
equilibrium [Eldredge and Gould, 1972; Gould and Eldredge, 1977]. Except for
Appendix A, the monograph is new work.
My interest in the geographical distributions of species range and richness was
stimulated by the writings of Stevens [1989] and Wilson [1992], who left me with
their sense that the problems were related, were among the great theoretical problems
of evolutionary biology, and at those times, were unsolved. Accepting this as a personal
challenge, I began this work in 2002 and was delighted to find them still unsolved as
late as 2006, at least [Carpenter et al., 2006]. With this monograph, I hope to convince
the reader that, at least for C3 plants at North American latitudes, this is no longer the
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
xvi R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
case. I also hope to convince the reader that the science of ecology, lying as it does at
the interface of biology and Earth science, has much to gain from practitioners skilled
in mathematics and physics (and from their cousins in engineering science) as well
as in the usual chemistry and biology.
My apologies for the difficult (if not impenetrable) notations brought on at least in
part by the need to average in four dimensions.
Peter S. Eagleson
Cambridge, Massachusetts
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-FM AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 14:2
Acknowledgments
W ithout the continuing love and unselfish personal sacrifice of my wife, Beverly,
this work would never have been completed. She must share whatever credit
ensues, while I alone, of course, am responsible for the inevitable errors and omissions.
I wish to thank four friends and colleagues for their unheralded contributions
to this work: Dara Entekhabi (Massachusetts Institute of Technology), for his most
generous donation of time and effort in providing the reduced satellite data used
herein as well as frequent advice on how to use them; Ignacio Rodrıguez-Iturbe
(Princeton University), for being a valued sounding board for my ideas, my guide to
the important people and ideas of modern ecology, and, as my closest friend for almost
40 years, a constant source of advice, encouragement, and inspiration; the late C. Allin
Cornell (Stanford University), for long ago making the power of probability-based
decision accessible to me through both personal tutelage and the clarity of his classic
textbook [Benjamin and Cornell, 1970]; and finally, John MacFarlane (Massachusetts
Institute of Technology), for providing the beautiful line drawings that are critical to
the transmission of these ideas.
I must also thank the anonymous reviewers of the manuscript, whose thoughtful
comments, corrections, and suggestions have improved the finished product measur-
ably.
Finally, I am indebted to the Massachusetts Institute of Technology Department
of Civil and Environmental Engineering, for generous financial assistance with
manuscript preparation through resources of the Edmund K. Turner Professorship,
and to the students and faculty of the department’s Parsons Laboratory for Environ-
mental Science and Engineering, who have graciously tolerated me “hanging around”
after the ball was over.
xvii
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
P A R T I
OVERVIEW
Newtonian-Darwinian Synthesis
I suggest that particularity and contingency, which characterize the ecologicalsciences, and generality and simplicity, which characterize the physical sciences,are miscible, and indeed necessary, ingredients in the quest to understand hu-mankind’s home in the universe.
Harte [2002, p. 34]
Universal Laws of Life?
. . . it is reasonable to conjecture that the coarse-grained behavior of living systemsmight obey quantifiable universal laws that capture the system’s essential features.
West and Brown [2004, p. 36]
1
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
C H A P T E R 1
Introduction
Historical summary
In 1975, Eduardo Rapoport summarized and analyzed the observed geographical
patterns in species’ distribution of both plants and animals. Among other findings,
he reported that with increasing latitude, the richness (also often referred to as di-
versity, which is “richness” in the number of different species, with each species
weighted by the number of like individuals present in the area) of species decreases,
while the latitudinal range of individual species increases. Using a series of simple
ecophysiological models, Woodward [1987] explored his own conclusion that climate
exerts principal control on the distribution of major vegetation types but arrived at
no sense of which climate variable was dominant. Finally, in their assessment of
biodiversity in a warmer world, Svenning and Condit [2008] found that little direct
evidence of what causes range limits had, at that date, been incorporated into models
of the impacts of global warming.
Matching observed exceptions to Rapoport’s [1975] separate latitudinal gradients
of richness and range for common taxa, Stevens [1989] posited an ecological con-
nection between the two gradients. He observed the correlation between north-south
range and latitude to hold for a wide variety of taxa and therefore to be the fundamen-
tal, independent relationship. He gave it the name “Rapoport’s rule.” Using trees as an
example (see Figure 1.1a), Stevens reasoned that their tolerance of variable climatic
conditions (he considered only precipitation and temperature) had to span the sea-
sonal climatic variations experienced in their habitat and that therefore, to paraphrase
him, the large latitudinal extent of high-latitude organisms (i.e., their “range”) results
from the selective advantage to those individuals having the wide climatic tolerances
needed for success in a particular high-latitude location. Stevens [1989] traced the
3
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
4 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 1.1 Observed Latitudinal Gradients of Tree Species’ Range and Diversity: a. Ranges ofLocal Tree Species in North America [Stevens, 1989]; Error Bars Define ±1 Std. Error of the MeanLocal Range, N = Number of Sites (data from Brockman [1968]); With permission of The Universityof Chicago Press: AMERICAN NATURALIST, vol. 133, issue 2, February, 1989, pp. 240–256, Fig. 1 (topleft): c© 1989 The University of Chicago Press: b. Local Diversity of Tree Species [Enquist and Niklas,2001] (from Global Data of Gentry [1988, 1995]); Adapted by permission fromMacmillan PublishersLtd: NATURE, vol. 410, 5 April 2001, pp. 655–660, Fig. 1a: c© 2001.
finding of the latitudinal trend in species’ richness to the 1878 work of Wallace and
pointed out its later observational confirmation by a host of others. For a more recent
example, see Figure 1.1b, reproduced from Enquist and Niklas [2001], who used
the extensive data for trees compiled earlier by Gentry [1988, 1995]. However, there
remains continuing lack of agreement on the cause of the latitudinal trend in richness
[Roy, 2001]. For example, Fischer [1960] found species richness to be inversely re-
lated to local seasonal climate variability; Wright [1983] found that richness followed
the amount of energy available; Currie and Paquin [1987] concluded not only that
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
C H A P T E R 1 • I N T R O D U C T I O N 5
species richness is controlled by the total available energy, but also that seasonal cli-
matic variability has no effect; and Scheiner and Rey-Benayas [1994] found species
richness and climate variability to be directly (as opposed to inversely) related.
Addressing the species richness gradient, or, as he called it, “tropical preeminence,”
Wilson [1992, p. 199] found the cause to be “one of the great theoretical problems
of evolutionary biology,” noting that “many have called the problem intractable,” and
attributed its likely cause to geographic variations in productivity. For a probable basis
for Rapoport’s rule, he, too, pointed to the local climatic variability introduced by the
seasons.
Huston [1994] presented an exhaustive review of published work on biological
richness (approximately 2000 references covering the vast research literature of the
20th century), in which he also sought to explain [Huston, 1994, p. 2] “the regulation
of species diversity and why the number of co-occurring species varies under different
conditions.” He postulated the total species diversity of a local community to be given
by the sum of the diversities of separate classes of species present, in which case, the
same total diversity could be obtained by different combinations of the classes, and
there would be no universal explanation of species diversity.
A major advance in the theory of biodiversity came in 2001 in the form of unified
neutral theory [Hubbell, 2001] (hereinafter referred to as the Neutral Theory, when
capitalized thusly), which determines, from generalized population statistics, the rich-
ness and abundance of species in a single metacommunity. Assuming that nutritional
(i.e., “trophic”) similarity among members of a particular ecological metacommunity
makes other differences among them irrelevant to their presence, Neutral Theory
predicts the richness and abundance of all species in that metacommunity given a
single observation from the same metacommunity of (for example) the abundance of
a single species.
Finally, the Millennium Ecosystem Assessment [Carpenter et al., 2006, p. 257–
258] finds that “we lack a robust theoretical basis for linking ecological diversity to
ecosystem dynamics.”
Modeling philosophy
We propose here that, to the zeroth order, it is the species dependence of the energy
needed for seed germination and (as we shall see) for maximum unstressed produc-
tivity that locally governs both the richness and range of species due to the local and
spatial variability of incident radiation during the growing season. Local variation
in the availability of water and/or nutrients is assumed to be reflected in the local
standing biomass but, to the order of these approximations, not in the selection of the
species present.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
6 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 1.2 Typical Photosynthetic Be-haviors (see Figure A.4).
We choose for analysis a single vegetation class (i.e., a “functional type” in Huston’s
[1994] classification), namely, vascular land plants, which comprise approximately
98% of all extant land plants, as is shown in the frontispiece. This should include the
predominant trees of at least the middle and high latitudes (i.e., the temperate and
boreal forests), for which observations are plentiful and thus can provide a meaningful
test of our proposition. In a further restriction of this functional type, we consider
only the so-called C3 class of vascular vegetation because the class constitutes about
93% of all living vascular land plants (see the frontispiece). Plants utilizing the C3
(i.e., Calvin cycle) photosynthetic pathway predominate in humid and shady habitats
in the form of deciduous trees and shrubs [Ehleringer and Cerling, 2002], and they
dominate almost exclusively in alpine and cold regions as evergreen trees and shrubs
[Li et al., 2004]. The C3 plants also predominate in submerged habitats, where they
have as great a diversity as in the terrestrial environment [Keely, 1999]. Plants utilizing
the C4 (i.e., Hatch-Slack) pathway dominate in dry and sunny habitats as grasses and
sedges. Finally, plants utilizing the CAM (i.e., Crassulacean acid metabolism) pathway
dominate in very arid regions as succulents, and in low light as epiphytes, but are not
an appreciable part of the global carbon cycle [Ehleringer and Cerling, 2002].
Fortunately for the current purposes, each C3 species has a distinctive, saturating,
leaf photosynthetic capacity function defining, to zeroth order, a Darwinian optimum
state at the function’s asymptote intersection, which is at once unique to that species,
stressless, maximally productive, and maximally efficient (see Figure A3). The rising
asymptote is common to all C3 species and thus, containing all the optima, serves
as our basis for competitive natural selection among other C3, and hence as func-
tionally analogous, local species. This saturating photosynthetic capacity function is
illustrated, along with its (dashed) asymptotes, in the sketch of Figure 1.2, where it is
contrasted with the C4 and CAM classes of species (see earlier discussion), far less
common at these latitudes, and most of which do not saturate. We return to this figure
later in order to illustrate our model of the selection process. Normalization of the C3
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
C H A P T E R 1 • I N T R O D U C T I O N 7
photosynthetic capacity curve is carried out in Appendix A and is shown graphically
in Figure A4.
Within these restrictions, we seek primarily to provide a theoretical, analytical,
bioclimatic explanation of species range and richness over the extratropical latitudes.
In their full bioclimatic detail, these problems are dauntingly complex, so we consider
instead a highly idealized and reduced bioclimatic system whose average biophysi-
cal processes obey Darwinian imperatives. By concentrating on capturing the sense
and form of the gradients, rather than their precise magnitude, we admit additional
corresponding mathematical approximations such as space and time averaging, lin-
earization, and order-of-magnitude analysis.
Horn [1971, p. 121] pointed out that “a frontal assault on the first factor in a
multidimensional problem may show that many of the presently known patterns
can be understood in terms of that factor alone.” Wilson [1965, p. 59] defined “the
search strategy employed to find points of entry into otherwise impenetrably complex
systems” as reductionism, and as such, “reductionism is the primary and essential
activity of science.” The reductionist approach is common to physics and engineering
[Harte, 2002] but is anathema to many biologists [e.g., Anderson, 1972]. Prominent
among the latter was the pioneering evolutionary synthesist Ernst Mayr (1904–2005),
noted also for his criticism of reductionists, who tried to analyze biology in the manner
of physics. This issue has resurfaced with the growth of interest in Earth system
science, which, in the words of Harte [2002, p. 29], “seeks no less than a predictive
understanding of the complex system comprising organisms, atmosphere, fresh water,
oceans, soil, and human society.” To find a useful way through this overwhelming
complexity, Harte [2002] calls for the development of simple, mechanistic models
that capture the essence of the problem but not all the details. West and Brown [2004,
p. 36] agree that “such idealized constructs would provide a zeroth-order point of
departure for quantitatively understanding real bioclimatic systems,” and we subscribe
to this viewpoint herein, adopting their use of “zeroth order” as broadly descriptive
of our level of approximation. According to MacArthur [1972, p. 127], “the ranges
of single species would seem to be the basic unit of biogeography,” and hence we will
begin there.
Bioclimatic basis for local community structure
Tilman [1982, 1988] suggested that the particular local species having the lowest re-
quirement among multiple local species for a single, common limiting resource (such
as light, water, nitrates, or phosphates) will always be competitively dominant locally
and that the local community structure results from one or more such competitive
interactions. Stevens [1989] was perhaps the first to reason that certain key aspects of
community structure, namely, the local variability of species range and richness, may
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
8 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
result from spatial and temporal variability of the local climate. We follow these leads
in this work. In keeping with a zeroth-order approach, our use of the term “climate”
refers to the statistics of the single most important external influence on local vege-
tation growth from among such factors as the availability, over the growing season,
of light, CO2, heat, water, or nutrients. (The concentration of CO2 at the canopy top
is not the same everywhere, being distinctly seasonal in the Northern Hemisphere
and essentially without seasonality in the Southern Hemisphere, but having a diurnal
fluctuation in both hemispheres [Bonan, 2002]. The concentration falls steeply within
the canopy from a maximum in the free atmosphere, and at least in tropical forests,
from decay at the forest floor, to a minimum at the lowest leaf, or at some internal
level in the tropics.) It is our view that over much, if not most, of Earth’s surface, this
is clearly the shortwave radiative flux (i.e., “light”) due weakly to its selective germi-
nation of species by production of heat on absorption by viable seed, and strongly to
its subsequent support of stable emergent plant matter through C3 photosynthesis (see
Figures 1.2 and Appendices A–C). We assume that to this order, these processes are
modulated, rather than controlled, by any local unavailability of the other resources
listed previously.
In our zeroth-order approximation of the C3 species, as is shown in Figure 1.2,
we replace the actual photosynthetic capacity curve of species C23 by its asymptotes,
thereby fixing the optimum operating state for species C23 at the shortwave (SW)
flux, corresponding to the asymptotic intersection. If this flux is the long-term (i.e.,
multiseasonal) local average, I0, then C23 will be the modal species at that location,
and in Figure 1.2, we refer to this flux as I 20 .
In any year, the single-season average SW flux, I0, may be, at this same location,
either larger or smaller than I 20 , thereby optimally supporting species C3
3 or C13 in
that year, respectively. However, in the long-term average at location 2, only C23
can be optimally supported at the average SW flux I 20 . Species 1 will be unstressed
(triangle) and thus stable at location 2 but underproductive compared to many other
stable species there, and species 3 will be stressed (diamond) and thus absent at
location 2.
With such reasoning, we arrive at a one-sided distribution of stable species, sup-
ported by all I0 ≤ I0 at each location, which proves to be key to our predictions of both
range and richness. (It seems appropriate at this juncture to point out that our sim-
plifying omission of respiration from the photosynthetic capacity function prevents
identifying other C3 species having the same productivity but differing respiration.
Also, because we are interested in the meridional variation of range and richness, our
selection of C3 species behavior for our model on the basis of their global predom-
inance will overlook the very large numbers of C4 and CAM plants in the tropical
latitudes.)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
C H A P T E R 1 • I N T R O D U C T I O N 9
FIGURE 1.3 Taylor Se-ries Approximation to theBioclimatic Function.
Range
In the case of species range, we assume that the controlling mechanism is this “in-
terannual” variability (about a constant long-term mean value) of light during the
growing season, and we begin by using the statistical technique of “derived distri-
butions” to estimate an approximate relationship between the (causative) mean and
variance of this local light (i.e., “climate”) and the (resulting) mean and variance of
stable, local species. This approximation replaces the mean of a function of random
variables by the same function of their means and is valid for small coefficients of
variation of those random variables and for small nonlinearity of the function [see,
e.g., Benjamin and Cornell, 1970]. We apply this Taylor series approximation with
respect to independent variations in climate as illustrated in Figure 1.3. Its analytical
basis follows.
We let c represent the randomly annually variable local light as averaged over
each annual growing season (i.e., c ≡ I0), and we let s be a continuously distributed,
single-valued, numerical representation of the resulting optimally supported local
C3 species in each season. These stressless species are identified from the normal-
ized C3 photosynthetic capacity curve as averaged over the depth of the canopy
[Eagleson, 2002, Appendix H] (Appendices A and B) by their surrogates, the projected
leaf-area indices (i.e., s ≡ βLt ), producing saturation at each of the local seasonal-
average SW fluxes, I0. We call them the “optimally supported” species at these fluxes
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
10 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
and relate them through the bioclimatic function
s = g(c). (1.1)
As described earlier, in any year, c has a single value locally, and thus only one local
species is being supported optimally. Among species already existing there, those for
which the saturating SW flux is greater than the local annual SW flux will be stressed
and thus unstable there this year, while those for which the saturating flux is smaller
than the local annual flux will be unstressed and thus stable but underproductive there
now (see Figures 3.2 and 3.4a). Actually, of course, the local species will be discretely
distributed in s, but we postpone that consideration until it becomes necessary for
counting purposes, when dealing with the species richness issue. At that time, we
must also consider the geographical scale of the species richness count because (all
else remaining constant) species count is observed to rise and eventually saturate with
increasing area of observation [Huston, 1994].
In the next growing season, when the climate takes on a new value, a new species
will be optimally supported. Every new growing season having a previously expe-
rienced climate will support no new optimum species (provided that species still
survives), and any prior season’s optimum species may or may not survive to the
present time. In this way, we can imagine a stable distribution of local species evolv-
ing over the years, which reflects the characteristic annual variability of local climate
(see Figure 3.4a). Issues of species hardiness in the face of stress will control surviv-
ability and hence the presence or absence of certain predicted off-mean local species
at a given time, particularly in the tails of the distribution. We will discuss this issue
further when interpreting our results.
Referring again to Figure 1.3, if the coefficient of variation, CV, of c, that is,
CV(c) ≡ [VAR(c)]1/2/E(c), is small enough at any given location, c is likely to lie
close to its long-term mean value, E(c) ≡ c, there. We may then expand g(c) in a
Taylor series about this mean climatic state to obtain [see, e.g., Benjamin and Cornell,
1970]
g (c) = g (c) + (c − c)dg (c)
dc
∣∣∣∣c+ (c − c)2
2
d2g (c)
dc2
∣∣∣∣∣c
+ . . . . (1.2)
If, as we assume, the curvature of g(c) at c (i.e., d2g(c)/dc2|c) is small, the third
and higher terms of equation (1.2) may be neglected. Since the expected value of the
second term of equation (1.2) is identically zero, the approximate first moment of
equation (1.1) is then
s ≡ E [s] ≈ g (c) , (1.3)
in which s is the local community-average species, demonstrating that under these
approximations, the mean of the bioclimatic function is equal to the same function of
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
C H A P T E R 1 • I N T R O D U C T I O N 11
its means. Similarly, because the variance of the first term of equation (1.2) is zero,
the approximate second moment of equation (1.1) becomes
σ 2s (s) ≈ σ 2
c
[dg(c)
dc
∣∣∣∣c
]2
. (1.4)
with c always close to c locally, as we have assumed,
dg(c)
dc
∣∣∣∣c≈ dg(c)
dc. (1.5)
It is important to note that equations (1.3) and (1.4) are independent of the sign
of dg (c)/
dc, leaving the geometric form of g (c) unconstrained at this level of
approximation. Because VAR [aY ] ≡ a2VAR [Y ] [see Benjamin and Cornell, 1970],
equations (1.4) and (1.5) allow estimation of the standard deviation of local species
to be
σs (s) ≈ σc
∣∣∣∣
ds
dc
∣∣∣∣, (1.6)
in which σs (s) is the standard deviation of the local species given in species units.
As we shall see in chapter 2, in our idealized, unchanging, and zonally homogeneous
world, there is also a one-to-one relationship between the zonal average climate, c, and
the associated zonal latitude, �, and hence, given equation (1.3), there is a one-to-one
relationship, s = h (�), between the zonal average species, s, and �. This allows us
to change the variable in terms of which σs is expressed from σs (s) to σs (�), which
is quite convenient for the current purposes. With local linear approximation, this is
written, as for equation (1.6),
σs (�) ≈ σs (s)∣∣∣
dsd�
∣∣∣
= σs (s)∣∣∣
dsdc
∣∣∣
∣∣ dc
d�
∣∣. (1.7)
Finally, combining equations (1.6) and (1.7) yields the zeroth-order approximation
σs (�) ≈ σc∣∣dc
/
d�∣∣, (1.8)
which forms the basis for our estimation of the range of the mean species at latitude,
�0. Without considering species stability, the local distribution of species is double
sided, resulting in this range being formed as shown by R s|�0 in Figure 1.4, and which
we note to be independent of the form of the bioclimatic function, s = g (c). While not
needed here for our zeroth-order theoretical estimation of species range and richness,
we include identification of the full bioclimatic function in the appendices. There we
derive the optimal form of g (c) from a proposition that equates the maximums of
plant CO2 supply and demand in a temporary state we call “evolutionary equilibrium.”
In its simplest form, this results in the zeroth-order bioclimatic function
βLt = g (I0) , (1.9)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
12 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 1.4 Idealized Range ofMean Local Species (for the Case I 0↓as �↑, and without consideration ofspecies stability).
which is the theoretically defined form of equation (1.1), and its approximate local
average
βLt ≈ g(
I0)
(1.10)
is the theoretically defined form of equation (1.3). Once again, in these equations,
βLt is the (dimensionless) species-defining, total horizontal leaf-area index of the
particular local species that is optimally supported by the climate-defining local
seasonal shortwave radiative flux at the canopy -top, I0 (β is the cosine of the canopy-
average leaf angle, and Lt is the canopy leaf-area index, i.e., the total single-side leaf
area per unit of projected canopy area). The local average of the species variable is
βLt , and the local multiseason average of the climate variable is I0.
This model is essentially an expression of Neutral Theory [Hubbell, 2001] in that
it implicitly assumes the equivalent per capita fitness for all local species unstressed
on the local average. We refer to our model as a neutral theory (lower case intended)
in that, contrary to Hubbell [2001], its basis for prediction of local species richness
is local observations of light variability, rather than vegetation observations at a
different scale. We must remember that our bioclimatic function is single valued in
the assumed species-defining βLt , while in reality, it is likely that multiple species
share the same leaf-area index and instead are differentiated productively by their
superior utilization of resources neglected here such as water or nitrogen. Kraft et al.
[2008] present evidence supporting a nonneutral view of tropical forest dynamics in
which co-occurring species display differing ecological strategies.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
C H A P T E R 1 • I N T R O D U C T I O N 13
FIGURE 1.5 Range and Richness of Vascular Land Plants on the Continents. Range: Theory isfor C 3 vascular land plants in N.A.; observations are for all trees (open circles) in N.A. [Brockman,1968]. Richness: Theory is for C 3 vascular land plants in the N.H.; observations are for all vascularland plants (solid circles) in the W.H. as presented by Huston [1994, Figure 2.1, p. 20]† based uponReid and Miller [1989]†† and for all trees (pluses) in the N.H. [Gentry, 1988, 1995] as scaled in Fig-ure 4.1. †Reprinted with the permission of Cambridge University Press. ††Walter V. Reid and KentonR. Miller, 1989, Keeping Options Alive: The Scientific Basis for Conserving Biodiversity, World Re-sources Institute, Washington, D.C., using data from Davis et al. [1986] and WRI//IIED [1988], bothunavailable to the author. With kind permission of the World Resources Institute.
For the particular case in which the right-hand side of equation (1.7) increases
monotonically with s, we illustrate in Figure 1.4 (lower abscissa) the use of σs (s) to
estimate Rs|�◦ (s), which is the range, in species units, of the mean species, s, to be
expected at latitude �◦. In using this range of the mean to compare with Brockman’s
[1968] observed mean of the ranges (see Figure 1.1a), we assume zonal homogeneity
of climate. We note here that Figure 1.4 is idealized for illustrative purposes in its
use of normal distributions of local species, truncated everywhere at ±ns standard
deviations, σs (s), from the local mean, s. Actually, as we have discussed earlier,
species optimally supported by I0 > I0 locally will be stressed on average and thus
assumed absent, leaving the distribution of observed s as single sided. To estimate
Rs|�◦ (�), which has the same range as Rs|�◦ (s) but is measured in units of � (upper
abscissa in Figure 1.4), we use the transformation of the independent variable from
s → �, as given by equation (1.7) and embodied in equation (1.8). Note also that as
a result of equation (1.9), σc ≡ σI0 .
We compare our theoretical prediction of range with the Brockman [1968] obser-
vations in advance in Figure 1.5.
Richness
It has long been recognized that local intraseasonal disturbances in light and hence
heat play an important role (among many other factors) in the local germination of
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
14 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
terrestrial plant seedlings [see, e.g., Tilman, 1982; Larcher, 1983]. Following our
apparent success in chapter 3 when identifying thriving species with time-average
stresslessness, we assume here as well that only those light pulses i0 for which i0 ≤ I0
will germinate and support stable seedlings leading to countable local species. We
thus assume the maximum possible zonal species richness, max �s , to be equal to
the zonal-average maximum number, νmax, of those particular, independent, discrete
pulses, i0 ≤ I0, in the local shortwave radiative flux occurring during that basic unit
of ecological time, the growing season. Defining the light pulses as a continuous
series of supportive i0 ≤ I0, followed by an unsuppportive i0 > I0, there will be, on
average, an equal number of each in a season. This number is estimated (chapter 4)
assuming a Poisson distribution of independent local i0 ≤ I0 arrivals and a gamma
distribution of their seasonal shortwave interception to be
max �s∼= mν + niσν = ( I� − I0)2
σ 2I0
[
1 + 1
κ
]
+ ni( I� − I0)
σI0
[
1 + 1
κ
]1/2
,
(1.11)
which is termed “maximum” due to the possible presence of some serial depen-
dencies and biologically insufficient strengths among the pulses. I� and I0 are the
growing season–average, top-of-the-atmosphere and canopy-top shortwave fluxes,
respectively; κ is the shape parameter of the gamma distribution of seasonal short-
wave interception by the individual cloud events; and ni is the number of standard
deviations of this distribution incorporating the desired probability mass. This is an
inversion of a successful existing model for predicting annual local rainfall statistics,
given the observed frequency and properties of individual local storms [Eagleson,
1978]; here we know the statistics of the observed SW flux and seek the maximum
frequency, mν + niσν , of its seasonal fluctuations. We compare this theoretical max-
imum with the zonal richness observed by Gentry [1988, 1995], as summarized in
advance here in Figure 1.5.
Once again, we must remember that our assumed single-valued relationship be-
tween light and species will cause us to misrepresent the number of local species
wherever the supply of water and/or nutrients controls productivity, which happens
in the tropics, as has been shown by Kraft et al. [2008].
Note in equation (1.11) the inverse relationship of σI0 to the local limit of species
richness in contrast to its direct relationship to the range (see equation (1.8), in which
σc ≡ σI0 ). Therein lies the theoretical basis for the opposing latitudinal gradients of
range and richness previously observed by Stevens [1989] and others.
Major simplifications
Our reductionist approach to the biophysics of these problems invokes many ideal-
izations in addition to the mathematical approximations introduced earlier. Principal
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
C H A P T E R 1 • I N T R O D U C T I O N 15
among these physical simplifications are the following: (1) species interactions, in
which the analysis allows for polycultures but neglects both the competitive interac-
tions that may occur between different species and the pervasive “more is different”
effect [Anderson, 1972] of multicultural symbiosis; (2) predator neglect, which omits
the effects of insects and other animals, including man, acting largely to reduce
theoretical productivity; (3) disease and fire neglect, thereby further overpredicting
productivity; (4) light as the limiting resource, which restricts concern to forest sys-
tems in which the local availability of water, nutrients, heat, and carbon dioxide is not
limiting and assumes the canopy-top atmosphere to be an effectively infinite reservoir
of CO2 at a concentration that is constant in both space and time; (5) a neutrally stable
atmosphere, which omits buoyant convection; (6) lateral advection of energy neglect,
which assumes only vertical local exchanges with the atmosphere; (7) a climate un-
affected by vegetation, which omits feedback from the surface; and (8) a spatially
homogeneous canopy structure, in which biophysical relations are developed for ad-
jacent leaf layers and applied without modification throughout monocultural canopies
in terms of spatially averaged crown structure and shade-induced variations in leaf
photochemistry.
Principal assumptions
Principal assumptions include the following: (1) maximization of net primary produc-
tivity, in which the governing selection mechanism is assumed to be a maximization of
the probability of reproductive success, as expressed through the surrogate maximiza-
tion of biomass, and hence seed, productivity at optimum average leaf temperature
and with adequate water and nutrients as well as negligible respiration; (2) bioclimatic
function, whereby the governing bioclimatic relation is derived for an assumed stress-
less, productivity-maximizing steady state, which yields a single-sided distribution
of stable local C3 species when forced by a normally distributed annual SW flux (it
is considered to be single valued and linear over the local range and only its sense
need be known); (3) range, in which the coefficient of variation of the local range is
small; (4) richness, whereby the number of local seasonal SW flux pulses, i0 ≤ I0,
sets the maximum number of local C3 species through their stimulation of selective
germination and stressless follow-on support of the struggling emergent plant matter;
and (5) flux pulses, which are intraseasonal flux pulses of intensity i0 ≤ I0 that arrive
locally at Poisson-distributed intervals and with gamma-distributed energy.
Principal findings
Regardless of our many approximations and unverified assumptions, we will con-
firm in conclusion that, at least within the latitudinal range 25◦N ≤ � ≤ 60◦N of
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-01 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 22:27
16 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
continental North America, both range and richness owe their latitudinal gradients
to the local variability (both temporally and latitudinally) in shortwave radiative flux,
produced by transient local cloud events and solar altitude, as outlined above, respec-
tively. Our conclusive demonstration of this is previewed here by our very favorable
comparison of theory and observation for species range and richness over extratropi-
cal latitudes, as presented in Figure 1.5. It seems from this work that the spatial and
temporal variabilities in shortwave flux may be the true basis for the biogeography of
plants over at least the extratropical fraction of Earth’s vegetated land surface.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-02 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:42
P A R T I I
Local Species Range and Richness
“Zeroth-Order” Analysis
A frontal assault on the first factor in a multidimensional problem may show thatmany of the presently known patterns can be understood in terms of that factoralone.
Horn [1971, p. 121]
Such ideal constructs would provide a zeroth-order point of departure for quan-titatively understanding real biological systems . . .
West and Brown [2004, p. 36]
17
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-02 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:42
C H A P T E R 2
Local Climate: Observations and Assessments
Major biomes of North America
Figure 2.1 sketches the approximate boundaries of the major biomes of North Amer-
ica, as adapted from maps presented by Bailey [1997]. This figure makes qualitatively
apparent the zonal heterogeneity of the actual bioclimate owing to such irregularly
distributed influences as land surface topography and land-sea interactions. Never-
theless, to enable our zeroth-order analysis to go forward, we represent these biomes
as zonally homogeneous, with the approximate latitudinal boundaries listed in Ta-
ble 2.1 and shown as dashed lines in Figure 2.1. After presenting the observations
of pixel climate, we will make a more quantitative assessment of the actual zonal
homogeneity.
Growing season
As just stated, behavior of the land surface is idealized to be independent of longitude
in this work. Accordingly, we estimate the distribution of a zonally homogeneous, but
meridionally variable, nominal growing-season length, mτ , from the map of Trewartha
[1954, p. 46]. We present those estimates here in Table 2.2, centered commonly on the
summer solstice, Julian day 173 (22 June). Alternatively, when focusing our attention
on the warmer latitudes, say, below 35◦, we may use the summer solstice as the
centering date, but for the colder latitudes, say, above 35◦, the autumnal equinox (22
September) because by that time of year, the local ground temperatures will be more
supportive of growth in vascular plants.
19
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-02 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:42
20 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 2.1 Major biomesofNorthAmerica, as adapted fromBailey [1997]. Dashed lines boundapproximately zonally homogeneous biomes.
Solar radiation
To implement the zeroth-order estimation of species range, as outlined in chapter 1,
we select the incident shortwave radiation, I0, at canopy top during the growing season
as the single climatic forcing variable (c in equation (1.1)). This choice is supported
theoretically in the appendices through derivation of the “zeroth-order” bioclimatic
TABLE 2.1 Latitudinal Boundaries of North American Forest Biomesa
Forest Biome Latitude (◦N)
Tundra Northward of 60◦
Boreal 52◦–60◦
Humid temperate 24◦–52◦
Humid tropical 0◦–24◦
aApproximated from Figure 2.1.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-02 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:42
C H A P T E R 2 • L O C A L C L I M A T E : O B S E R V A T I O N S A N D A S S E S S M E N T S 21
TABLE 2.2 Estimated Growing Season
Growing Season
Latitude (◦N) Nominal Lengthamτ (days) Periodb(Julian days)
0 365 1–3655 365 1–365
10 365 1–36515 330 8–33820 330 8–33825 200 73–27330 200 73–27335 150 98–24840 150 98–24845 105 120–22550 105 120–22555 75 136–21160 75 136–21165 35 155–19070 35 155–190
aEstimated from Trewartha [1954, Figure 1.35].bCentered on summer solstice (Julian day 173).
function (see equation (C.2)). Satellite remotely sensed solar radiation data (NASA–
Goddard Institute for Space Studies (GISS) International Satellite Cloud Climatology
Project (ISCCP) data set, with modeled modifications) have been reduced (D. En-
tekhabi, personal communication, 2005) to yield global values of annual average
surface all-sky daytime shortwave flux, I0, at the surface (i.e., canopy top), for each
land surface pixel over its associated nominal zonal growing season, mτ (see Table 2.2)
and for each of the 17 years (1984–2000) of this record. The pixels are of equal area
(77,312 km2) and are aligned in 2.5◦ zonal bands, giving a global total of 6596 land-
only pixels distributed latitudinally, as illustrated in Figure 2.2a. Distribution of the
number of land-only pixels in the Western Hemisphere is shown in Figure 2.2b. A
mixture of geostationary and polar-orbiting satellites provides global coverage every
3 hours [Pinker and Laszlo, 1992]. D. Entekhabi (personal communication, 2005)
used these annual pixel fluxes to calculate growing-season values of the following
climatic parameters of interest in this estimation of species range and diversity.
1. The first climatic variable is global zonal average, 〈I0〉, of the annual land
surface (i.e., canopy top) pixel shortwave radiative flux, I0 (hereinafter “SW flux”
or simply “light”). As an example, this is plotted in Figure 2.3, in watts-total (i.e.,
including UV as well as photosynthetically active radiation) per projected square
meter (Wtot m−2, or simply Wm−2), at all latitudes for growing season days 8–338.
Although there is a separate value of 〈I0〉 for each sample year of record at each
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-02 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:42
22 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
(a)
(b)
FIGURE 2.2 (a) Global number of land-only pixels in a zonal band. From NASA–Goddard Insti-tute for Space Studies (GISS) International Satellite Cloud Climatology Project (ISCCP) data set. (b)Number of land-only pixels in a zonal band in the Western Hemisphere. From NASA-GISS ISCCPdata set.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-02 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:42
C H A P T E R 2 • L O C A L C L I M A T E : O B S E R V A T I O N S A N D A S S E S S M E N T S 23
FIGURE 2.3 Global zonal average seasonal canopy-top, pixel, SW flux, 〈 I 0〉 (land only; daytime;growing season days 8–338). From NASA-GISS ISCCP data set, 1984–2000.
latitude, for clarity, in Figure 2.3, we show only bounding values at each �. The
latitudes having this particular nominal growing season (see Table 2.2) are indicated
in this and subsequent figures by the solid vertical lines at � =15◦ and 20◦. A similar
figure (not shown here) has been prepared for each of the separate growing seasons,
mτ , associated with the latitudes indicated in Table 2.2. The temporal sample mean
of the zonal average annual growing-season, pixel, canopy-top, SW flux at each � is
〈I0〉 and is given, for the Northern Hemisphere, in column 4 of Table 2.3. We note
that the mean of the average is identical to the average of the mean, 〈I0〉 ≡ ⟨
I0⟩
.
Also shown in Figure 2.3 are the extensions, to the equator, of the upper-latitude
gradients of⟨
I0⟩
. The significance of their intersection there is important to this work
and will be discussed in chapter 3.
2. The second climatic variable is global zonal average,⟨
σI0
⟩
, of the standard
deviation (over time), σI0 , of the seasonal, pixel, canopy-top, SW flux, I0 (watts-total
per meters squared). As an example,⟨
σI0
⟩
is plotted at all latitudes for growing season
days 8–338 in Figure 2.4. The latitudes having this estimated growing season (Table
2.2) are again indicated by the dashed vertical lines at � = 15◦ and 20◦, and the
values of⟨
σI0
⟩
are given, for the Northern Hemisphere latitudes, �, in column 5 of
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-02 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:42
24 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
TABLE
2.3
Zona
lAverage
ofObserved
PixelC
limatein
theNorthernHem
isphe
rea
Estim
ated
Growing
Num
ber
of〈 I 0
〉 ≡⟨ I 0
⟩ d⟨ σ
I 0
⟩σI 0
∣ ∣⟨ dI 0
/d�
⟩∣ ∣∣ ∣ ∣�
⟨ I 0⟩ / �
�
∣ ∣ ∣
�(◦N)
Season
b(Julianda
ys)
Land
Pixelsc
(Wtotm
−2)
(Wtotm
−2)
(Wtotm
−2)
(Wtotm
−2de
g−1)
(Wtotm
−2de
g−1)
σI 0
/⟨ I 0
⟩⟨ σ
I 0
⟩/⟨ I 0
⟩
01–
365
440.0
9.23
51–
365
450.0
8.57
3.5
101–
365
3347
5.0
8.00
18.73
5.1
4.4
0.03
90.01
715
8–33
837
494.0
8.70
30.23
0.0
1.9
0.06
10.01
820
8–33
843
493.8
9.17
42.20
3.8
1.0
0.08
50.01
925
73–2
7348
484.4
11.95
70.09
3.1
1.3
0.14
50.02
530
73–2
7354
481.3
12.60
63.93
1.7
1.5
0.13
30.02
635
98–2
4845
469.0
13.88
47.43
5.4
4.3
0.10
10.03
040
98–2
4850
438.5
12.85
34.50
8.0
6.5
0.07
90.02
945
120–
225
4940
4.0
12.56
29.38
7.2
7.7
0.07
30.03
150
120–
225
5636
1.5
14.35
22.37
7.8
6.9
0.06
20.04
055
136–
211
5033
5.0
17.46
15.39
5.2
5.0
0.04
60.05
257
.513
6–21
141
324.0
17.12
11.33
5.6
3.9
0.03
50.05
360
136–
211
4431
5.4
16.39
11.06
5.7
7.3
0.03
50.05
265
155–
190
4626
9.2
17.58
16.62
6.9
5.5
0.06
20.06
5
aNASA
-GISSISCC
Pda
taset,19
84–2
000,
land
surfaceon
ly.D
atasetredu
cedby
D.Entekha
bi(persona
lcom
mun
ication,
2005
).Bo
ldfacedvalues
arefrom
Figu
res2.3–
2.6
inclusive.Re
maining
values
inthesecolumns
arefrom
similarfi
guresno
trep
rodu
cedhe
re.
bTable2.2.
c Figure2.2a.
dTimeaverag
eof
Figu
re2.3.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-02 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:42
C H A P T E R 2 • L O C A L C L I M A T E : O B S E R V A T I O N S A N D A S S E S S M E N T S 25
FIGURE 2.4 Global zonal average of the standard deviation of seasonal canopy-top, pixel, SWflux, 〈σ I 0 〉 (land only; daytime; growing season days 8–338). From NASA-GISS ISCCP data set, 1984–2000.
Table 2.3. In Figures 2.4–2.7, the North American value of the climate variable for the
same growing season (assumed to be at the same �) is indicated by the plotted circle.
Note (Figure 2.2b) that at this latitude, there are only three land pixels to average, and
the oceanic influence is therefore large.
FIGURE 2.5 Global standard deviation across longitudes of the average annual seasonalcanopy-top, pixel, SW flux, σ I 0 (land only; daytime; growing season days 8–338). From NASA-GISSISCCP data set, 1984–2000.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-02 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:42
26 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 2.6 Global zonal average of the meridional gradient of the average annual seasonalcanopy-top, pixel, SW flux, 〈d I 0/d�〉 (land only; daytime; growing season days 8–338). FromNASA-GISS ISCCP data set, 1984–2000.
3. The third climatic variable is global zonal standard deviation (across all pix-
els in the common zone), σI0, of the mean seasonal, pixel, canopy-top, SW flux, I0
(in watts-total per meters squared). This standard deviation is plotted for Northern
Hemisphere growing season days 8–338 in Figure 2.5 and is given at each Northern
FIGURE 2.7 Global zonal average of the daytime average SW flux at the top-of-the-atmospherefor June–September inclusive, I � . From NASA-GISS ISCCP data set, 1984–2000.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-02 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:42
C H A P T E R 2 • L O C A L C L I M A T E : O B S E R V A T I O N S A N D A S S E S S M E N T S 27
Hemisphere � in column 6 of Table 2.3. Note, in Figure 2.5, the large difference
between σI0at 17.5◦for North America compared to the entire Northern Hemi-
sphere, suggesting, at least for this latitude, the relative climatic homogeneity of the
former.
4. The fourth climatic variable is the global zonal average,⟨
d I0/
d�⟩
, of the
latitudinal gradient of the mean annual (i.e., growing season) pixel, canopy-top,
SW flux, I0 (in watts-total per meters squared). This is plotted for growing season
days 8–338 in Figure 2.6, and its absolute value is given at each � in column 7 of
Table 2.3. Note that with constant pixel size, the meridional pixel boundaries are not
common from pole to pole, and hence calculation of meridional spatial gradients of
pixel quantities introduces unnatural noise. This “operational” noise can be reduced
by replacing the average of the gradient,⟨
d I0/
d�⟩
, by the equivalent gradient of the
average, �⟨
I0⟩/
��, as is done in column 8 of Table 2.3. Note that �� carries a
sign, and hence, for ease in comparison of Northern Hemisphere and Southern Hemi-
sphere values of this gradient, the sign of the Northern Hemisphere values should be
reversed.
5. The fifth climatic variable is the Northern Hemisphere top-of-the-atmosphere
SW flux, I� (in watts-total per meters squared), time averaged for the June–September
season (presented in Figure 2.7). Because there are no clouds or other atmospheric
content affecting these top-of-the-atmosphere values, we may confidently attribute the
(approximately) 25 Wtotm−2 difference in I� between the equator and latitude 15◦N
to the average solar declination over the short, 122 day season for which this figure
was prepared. Referring back to Figure 2.3, we note that the 330 day average canopy-
top SW flux, 〈I0〉, displays an (approximately) 50 Wtotm−2 difference over the same
latitudinal interval. It follows, then, that the difference, �〈I0〉, over this same ��, as
shown in Figure 2.3, is likely the result of approximately equal parts solar declination
and an internal atmospheric effect such as radiation attenuation by the tropical cloud
cover.
Zonal homogeneity
The coefficient of spatial (i.e., zonal) variation, CVI0(�), of the temporal mean,
seasonal, pixel, canopy-top, SW flux, I0, at latitude � is written
CVI0≡ σI0
⟨
I0⟩ (2.1)
and measures the normalized longitudinal variability of pixel I0 at given �. It is
listed for the Northern Hemisphere in column 9 of Table 2.3 and is plotted versus
latitude in Figure 2.8. The heterogeneity of I0 is indicated by the magnitude of CVI0,
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-02 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:42
28 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 2.8 Assessment of climate zonal homogeneity in theNorthernHemisphere, CVI 0 . Plot-ted points are from Table 2.3, column 9.
with CV ≤ 0.1 representing a “good” degree of constancy [Benjamin and Cornell,
1970, p. 139]. The observed coefficient of longitudinal variation of the mean annual
pixel, canopy-top, SW flux fails this goodness test (and thus demonstrates a strong
longitudinal heterogeneity) only at those middle latitudes containing “dry” local
climates, as can be seen in Figure 2.8. Coupled with the North American versus
Northern Hemisphere disparity shown at latitude 17.5◦ in Figure 2.5, the preceding
“failure” gives only modest license to our zeroth-order zonal homogeneity assumption
for North America. In these middle latitudes, C3 plants are still plentiful but may be
limited more by water and heat availability than by light, suggesting that to isolate the
climate control of the moist forests, which are the subject of this limited work, and
TABLE 2.4 Zonal Average of Observed Pixel Climate in North America
Estimated Growing Season 〈 I 0〉 ≡ ⟨I 0
⟩b ⟨σ I 0
⟩b ∣∣�⟨I 0
⟩/��
∣∣c
�(◦N) (Julian days)a (Wtotm−2) (Wtotm−2) (Wtotm−2 deg−1)
26 73–273 497.2 11.931 73–273 473.7 9.9 4.636 98–248 451.3 10.9 5.841 98–248 416.0 10.8 6.346 120–225 388.5 11.9 6.351 120–225 353.0 12.9 6.156 136–211 327.9 12.9 5.461 136–211 299.2 12.3
aFrom Table 2.2.bData reduced by D. Entekhabi (personal communication 2005) from NASA–Goddard Institute for Space Studies
International Satellite Cloud Climatology Project data set (http://isccp.giss.nasa.gov/projects/flux.html).cDifferentials from columns 1 and 3.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-02 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:42
C H A P T E R 2 • L O C A L C L I M A T E : O B S E R V A T I O N S A N D A S S E S S M E N T S 29
thus more fully legitimize the assumption of zonal homogeneity, the dry-biome pixels
may need to be eliminated from the data sample. However, such sample selection is
not performed in this work.
Looking ahead
Looking forward to our estimation (in chapter 3) of species range for comparison
with the observations in North America (see Figure 1.1a) by Brockman [1968], we
add here Table 2.4, which contains the necessary North American climate estimates
as called for in equation (1.8). Owing to the shape of the North American continent,
there are five or more pixels per zone only for 25◦N ≤ � ≤ 70◦N (see Figure 2.2b);
thus, to reduce the inevitable noise introduced by small samples, we confine our
analysis to this latitudinal range, which coincides with that explored observationally
by Brockman [1968].
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3
Mean Latitudinal Range of Local Species:Prediction Versus Observation
It is suggested that the greater annual range of climatic conditions to whichindividuals in high-latitude environments are exposed relative to what low-latitudeorganisms face has favored the evolution of broad climate tolerances in high-latitude species. This broad tolerance of individuals from high latitudes has ledto wider latitudinal extent in the geographical range of high-latitude species thanof lower-latitude species.
Stevens [1989, p. 253]
Introduction and definitions
The data of Brockman [1968] presented here as the circles and bars in Figure 1.1a (as
adapted from Stevens [1989]) represent the mean (circles) and ±1 standard error of
the mean (bars) of the latitudinal ranges, in degrees of latitude, of the various species
found in N samples from within separate 5◦ zonal (i.e., latitudinal) bands across North
America. (To quote Stevens [1989, p. 240], “This pattern can be found by rounding
to the nearest 5◦ the northernmost and southernmost extremes of the geographical
ranges of individual species and then calculating the average north-to-south extent of
species found at each 5◦ band of latitude.”) The northerly and southerly latitudinal
extremes of location defining a given species’ range are not necessarily found at the
same longitude (i.e., not necessarily in the same remotely sensed pixel). As noted
by Svenning and Condit [2008], little direct evidence of what causes the limits of
range exists. We seek here to demonstrate the climatic basis for at least the observed
latitudinal trend in (if not the magnitude of) the mean latitudinal range of these zonal
species, but we first need to establish a clear (and regrettably complex) notation for the
several variables of importance. While not necessary, the reader may find it helpful
to read Appendices A–C before continuing.
31
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
32 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
The local (i.e., pixel) “climate,” and hence the associated pixel species, varies in
both time and space. By virtue of its temporal variability from growing season to
growing season, each pixel climate, c, will produce a probability distribution (i.e., a
probability density function (pdf)) of species, s, in that pixel. The local means of c (i.e.,
c) and s (i.e., s) are related by the bioclimatic function s = g (c). However, we find here
that, to zeroth order, the range is independent of the shape of this function. By virtue
of inevitable longitudinal inhomogeneities of climate, each latitude demonstrates a
zonal array of pixel climate means, c, and variances, σ 2c , resulting in a corresponding
zonal array of pixel species means, s, and variances, σ 2s .
With the primary species variable being its projected leaf area or radiation inter-
ception index, βLt (see equation (B.30)), we have s ≡ βLt and s ≡ βLt . (Note that to
limit the symbol size, we use the double overbar here, rather than the “hat,” to indicate
the local average species.) The zonal average of these pixel means is indicated by the
brackets, 〈· · ·〉, giving the zonal average climate, 〈c〉, and the zonal average species,
〈s〉 ≡ 〈βLt 〉. In summary, we define the following:
βLt ≡ individual species in a local pixel corresponding to the climate in that pixel
during a particular growing season
βLt ≡ mean of the local pixel species distribution corresponding to the time-averaged
local pixel climate over the average local growing season
〈βLt 〉 ≡ zonal average of the mean species, βLt , for all pixels at latitude �
σs ≡ standard deviation of local pixel species
〈σs|� 〉 ≡ zonal average of the standard deviation of local pixel species, σs , at �
Rs|�◦(�) ≡ range in degrees latitude of species, s ≡ βLt , at a local site having
� = �◦
Rs|�◦(�) ≡ range in degrees latitude of the mean species, s ≡ βLt , at a local site of
latitude, �◦
Rs|�◦(�) ≡ range in degrees latitude of the modal species, s, at a local site of latitude,
�◦
Rs|�◦(�) = mean of the ranges in degrees of all species, βLt , at a local site at �◦
R〈s〉|�◦(�) ≡ range in degrees of the zonal average local mean species, 〈s〉, at �◦
〈Rs|�◦(�)〉 ≡ zonal average in degrees of the mean of the ranges of all species at �◦
m2p = horizontal projection of canopied area, m2
Range of local mean species as determined by local distributionsabout the mean
The cause of, and the latitudinal change in, the range of local mean species has been
illustrated earlier in Figure 1.3, in which the ordinate, local mean species, s, is plotted
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 33
FIGURE 3.1 Idealized range of the mean local species (for the case I 0↓ as �↑).
against the statistically distributed local species, s, on the lower abscissa. This il-
lustration, repeated here for convenience as Figure 3.1, is idealized in that the local
species are shown to be distributed symmetrically about their mean to an effective
limit of ±ns standard deviations. The mean local species, s ≡ βLt , is reflected onto
the species scale of the lower abscissa of Figure 3.1 by the 1 to 1 rising straight line.
An example of bioclimatic function is derived in Appendix C as equation (C.16).
There maximally productive unstressed local average species is related to the local
average climate by the bioclimatic function
〈 I0〉⎡
⎣1 − e−⟨
βLt
⟩
1
⎤
⎦ = E1 = 0.62M Jpar m−2 h−1 = 172 Wtot m−2,
(3.1)
which is applicable for⟨
I0⟩
> E1. This zeroth-order mean value function specifies
s to be an inverse function of the local mean growing-season SW flux, which, in
turn, is determined by latitude � (see Figure 2.3), and with it we can transform
s (nonlinearly) into �, as is indicated, for the predominant case of I0 varying in-
versely with �, by the upper abscissa of Figure 3.1. To find the idealized ±nsσs
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
34 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 3.2 The physical basisof local C 3 species distribution. Fig-ure 3.2b adapted from Eagleson[2002, Figure 8.11a]. Copyright c©2002 Cambridge University Press.Reprinted with permission.
range of the mean species at latitude �◦, we take the difference, �+ − �−. To be
realizable, however, a species must be stable, that is, unstressed, but not necessarily
maximally productive, when the SW flux is other than that for optimal productivity.
We illustrate the consequences of this requirement in Figure 3.2 and in the following
paragraphs.
For a zeroth-order estimate of the distribution of local species resulting from
variable local annual SW flux, we note first that⟨
σI0
⟩
/⟨
I0⟩ ∼= O(10−2), as was shown
in column 10 of Table 2.3. This small value justifies a Taylor expansion of the
bioclimatic function about a local mean value, as was shown in equation (1.2).
For small curvatures of the bioclimatic function, this allows use of the form of
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 35
equation (3.1) in the vicinity of the mean to estimate the bioclimatic function as being
βLt = f (I0) ≈ �n[
1 − 172
I0
]−1
, I0 > 172 Wtot m−2. (3.2)
Equation (3.2) is sketched in Figure 3.2a. We see there that when the annual growing-
season SW flux, I0, is less than its local temporal average, I0, the species compatible
with I0 through equation (3.2) is greater than the local mean, βLt . In Figure 3.2b, we
present the potential assimilation efficiency (see Figure A.5) for the average leaves
of C3 trees in which the point labeled “1” represents the optimal operating point
[Eagleson, 2002] for the mean species, βLt . (The potential assimilation efficiency
(sometimes referred to as the “climatic assimilation potential”) represents the (zeroth-
order) locus of maximally efficient CO2 assimilation, for all species of C3 plants. We
restrict our consideration to these plants because of their global predominance coupled
with the strong species selection provided by this saturation efficiency maximization
mechanism.) The associated SW flux, Is�(βLt ), on the average leaf corresponds to the
mean canopy SW flux, I0, isolated in Figure 3.2a. Referring to Appendix A and the
discussion of Figure A.4, we can see in Figure 3.2b that a fluctuating annual leaf SW
flux (point 2) greater than that at point 1 will support a species, βLt < βLt , in that
year, which will be stressed under the average light at point 1, while those years of
less than average SW flux will introduce species, βLt > βLt , that remain unstressed
(point 3) under average conditions. Owing to their average condition of stress, the
species βLt < βLt are assumed to be absent from the local distribution over the long
term. This circumstance is summarized perhaps more clearly in Figure 3.3, where
the species assumed absent (and their associated SW fluxes) are shaded. Of course,
some of these stressed species may be present during the relatively short term of a
field observation program, thereby giving the observed distribution at any time an
attenuated left-hand (i.e., βLt < βLt ) branch.
The nonlinear form of equation (3.2), as plotted in Figure 3.2a, assures that an
assumed symmetrical distribution of annual SW fluxes will produce a distribution
of species, βLt , having positive skew (i.e., asymmetry about the mean) as shown in
Figure 3.3. At least for low curvatures of βLt = f (I0), we judge this asymmetry re-
finement to be inconsistent with the zeroth-order analysis adopted herein and proceed
using, at all I0, the idealized distribution shown in Figure 3.4a, along with the corre-
sponding cumulative distribution of stresslessness. Assuming species which would be
stressed on the average to be unstable and hence locally absent at all times, we adopt
the stress-constrained species distribution illustrated in Figure 3.4b. Furthermore, in
the same spirit of simplification through approximation, we take the mode, s, of the
truncated and skewed stress-free distribution to be the same as the mean, s, of the
idealized symmetrical distribution. How do we estimate the standard deviation, σs ,
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
36 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 3.3 Biological transformation of local distributions: SW flux⇒ C3 species (for the caseI 0↓ as �↑).
of this distribution, for in Figure 3.1, we have seen this second moment of equation
(3.2) to be a predictor of range?
Theoretical estimation of the range with climatic forcingby SW flux only
Writing the Taylor series approximation of equation (1.3) in terms of the primary
bioclimatic variables, we have, at arbitrary I0 [Benjamin and Cornell, 1970],
βLt = f (I0) ∼= βLt + (I0 − I0) dβLt
d I0
∣∣∣∣∣
I0
+ · · ·. (3.3)
For linear f (I0), or with only small variations of I0 for nonlinear f (I0), taking the
expected value and variance of both sides of equation (3.3) gives, respectively,
s ∼= βLt ≈ f ( I0), (3.4)
which we have found as equation (3.1), and
σ 2s (βLt ) = σ 2
I0
[
dβLt
d I0
∣∣∣∣∣
I0
]2
(3.5)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 37
FIGURE 3.4 Assumed frequen-cy distribution of local species. (a)Idealized distribution of speciesand stress. (b) Assumed stress-constrained local distribution ofC 3 species.
or,
σs(βLt ) = σI0
∣∣∣∣∣
dβLt
d I0
∣∣∣∣∣
I0
∣∣∣∣∣≈ σI0
∣∣∣∣∣∣
dβLt
d I0
∣∣∣∣∣∣
, (3.6)
in which σs(βLt ) is the standard deviation of the local species, s, as given in species
units, βLt . As was seen in Figure 3.1, σs is a fundamental determinant of range.
However, for comparison with Brockman [1968], we want σs and hence the range
to be measured in units of latitude, �, rather than of species, and will so define
it as σs(�). This is illustrated for the range of the modal (i.e., the most frequent)
species, s, at latitude � = �0 in Figure 3.5 for the case in which I0↓ and hence s↑(equation (3.2)) as �↑. To obtain the desired variable transformation, βLt → �, we
again employ the first term of a Taylor series expansion, this time of βLt = h(�) at
� = �−, as shown in Figure 3.5. For all latitudes at which species are determined
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
38 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 3.5 Constrained range of the modal local C 3 species (for the case I 0↓ as �↑).
“solely” by SW flux, this local linear approximation is written
σs(�) ≈ σs(βLt )∣∣∣∣
dβLt
d�
∣∣∣∣
= σs(βLt )∣∣∣∣
dβLt
d I0
∣∣∣∣·∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣
, � = �−. (3.7)
Eliminating σs(βLt ) between equations (3.6) and (3.7) gives, finally,
σs(�) ≈ σs(βLt )∣∣∣∣
dβLt
d I0
∣∣∣∣·∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣
≈σI0
∣∣∣∣
dβLt
d I0
∣∣∣∣
∣∣∣∣
dβLt
d I0
∣∣∣∣·∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣
= σI0∣∣d I0
/
d�∣∣, � = �−. (3.8)
As shown in Figure 3.5, the range, in degrees latitude, of the modal local species
at � = �◦ is then
Rs|�◦(�) = nsσs|�−(�) ≡ ns ·⎡
⎣σI0
∣∣∣∣∣
d I0
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⎤
⎦
∣∣∣∣∣∣�−
, (3.9)
where, introducing the simplified notation σs|�−(�) ≡ σs(�−),
�◦ ≡ �− + nsσs(�−), (3.10)
and ns , the number of local species standard deviations at � = �−, reflects the
observational completeness of the species identification.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 39
It is important to note that to the zeroth order, this estimate of the range of the local
modal species at � = �◦ is independent of any specific structure of the bioclimatic
function such as is proposed in equation (3.2). It requires only that we recognize
species determination to be solely by variation of the SW flux (specifically, the local
temporal, σI0 , and latitudinal spatial,∣∣d I0
/
d�∣∣, variabilities of the local SW flux at
� = �− or �+). In Figure 3.5, the truncated Taylor expansion of the bioclimatic
function used at � = �− in this approximation overpredicts the actual range by the
amount �R(�), as is indicated by the short-dashed line at angle α with the horizontal.
Considering the form of the bioclimatic function used here (equation 3.2), this error in
predicted range is largest at low latitudes, which is where we will find equation (3.9)
to break down.
Were I0 an increasing (i.e., direct) function of �, as is seen (using equation (3.2)
and Figure 2.3) to be the case for low latitudes, equation (3.10) would be replaced
by
�◦ ≡ �+ − nsσs(�+). (3.11)
Range of local modal species versus mean of local species’ ranges
To obtain the data plotted as the circles with error bars in Figure 1.1a, Brockman [1968]
averaged the observed ranges, Rs|�◦(�), in degrees latitude, �, of the different species,
s, found at each of N sample sites in a common zone, �0, to obtain the “sample”
(superscript “s”) zonal average range,⟨
Rss|�◦(�)
⟩
, and the sample variance, σ 2Rs
s|�◦ (�),
in that zone. Graphically scaling Brockman’s [1968] plotted ranges to obtain σRss|�◦ (�)
and⟨
Rss|�◦(�)
⟩
, we estimate the standard error of estimate, SE, of the zonal average
range,
SE(⟨
Rs|�◦(�)⟩) =
σRss|�◦ (�)
⟨
Rss|�◦(�)
⟩ , (3.12)
to be of order 10–2 to 10–1, depending on zonal latitude. This small variability of
average range over the sample longitudes in the same zone supports our assumption,
in chapter 1, of reasonable zonal homogeneity in the causative climate, at least at
those North American latitudes studied by Brockman [1968]. Thus, in keeping with
our zeroth-order approximation, we assume the interannual pixel climatic variability,
and hence species variability, to have common statistics for all pixels in the same zone
on any land surface, making σs|�◦(�) ∼= constant from pixel to pixel, and s ∼= 〈s〉 at
any common �◦.
Furthermore, assuming the functional bioclimatic relation between range and
species to be linear over the span �� of the ranges Rs|�◦(�) at �◦, the zonal
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
40 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
average range,⟨
Rs|�◦(�)⟩
, which is the quantity measured by Brockman [1968] and
displayed here in Figure 1.1a, may be approximated by the range of the zonally av-
eraged species, R〈s〉|�◦(�). This, in turn, is equal to the range of the zonal average
of the local average species, 〈s〉. Zonal homogeneity further provides that the zonal
modal species is identical to the zonal average of the local modal species, 〈s〉. These
approximations give
⟨
Rs|�◦(�)⟩ ≈ R〈s〉|�◦(�) ≈ R〈s〉|�◦(�), (3.13)
and therefore we seek, for zeroth-order comparison with Brockman’s [1968] obser-
vations, the theoretical range of the zonal average of the modal pixel species at the
given latitude. Note that we have assumed the mode and mean of the local species
distribution to be equal, which is exact for a “complete” (i.e., double-sided normal
distribution) but only approximate for the “single-sided” (and skewed) distributions
considered stable herein. With the approximation of the standard deviation of local
species in latitude units, as given by equation (3.8), our estimator of the n–standard
deviation range of the zonal average local modal species at � = �◦ becomes (see
Figure 3.5)
⟨
Rs|�◦(�)⟩ ≈ ⟨
Rs|�◦(�)⟩ = ns ·
⟨
σI0
∣∣∣∣∣
d I0
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⟩
�−= ns · ⟨σs(�−)
⟩
, (3.14)
in which [Benjamin and Cornell, 1970]
⟨
σI0
∣∣∣∣∣
d I0
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⟩
�−=⎡
⎣⟨
σI0
⟩ ·⟨∣∣∣∣∣
d I0
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⟩⎤
⎦
�−
+ COVz
⎡
⎣σI0,
∣∣∣∣∣
d I0
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⎤
⎦
�−
, (3.15)
where COVz is the zonal covariance at � = �−, as given by
COVz
⎡
⎣σI0,
∣∣∣∣∣
d I0
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⎤
⎦
�−
≡⟨⎡
⎣(
σI0 − ⟨σI0
⟩) ·⎛
⎝
∣∣∣∣∣
d I0
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1
−⟨∣∣∣∣∣
d I0
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⟩⎞
⎠
⎤
⎦
�−
⟩
.
(3.16)
Calculation of these covariances is noisy due to the necessary inversion of the
latitudinal gradient of local I0, and this gradient must be estimated using observational
pixels from adjacent zones that, due to identical pixel area at all latitudes, are not
aligned on common meridians. D. Entekhabi (personal communication, 2007) has
estimated the terms of equation (3.15) globally using the 22 year NASA–Goddard
Institute for Space Studies (GISS) International Satellite Cloud Climatology Project
(ISCCP) data set, and a relevant summary is given here in Table 3.1, from the last
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 41
TABLE 3.1 Observed Covariance of σ I 0 and d�/d I 0a
�(◦N)⟨σ I 0d�
/d I 0
⟩(◦N) COV
[σ I 0 , d�
/d I 0
](◦N) Column 3/Column 2
15, 20 23 2 0.0925, 30 30 0 035, 40 60 0 045, 50 80 2 0.0355, 60 130 0 0
aFrom 22 year NASA–Goddard Institute for Space Studies (GISS) International Satellite
Cloud Climatology Project (ISCCP) data set (daytime, growing season, land surface only,
Northern Hemisphere). Calculations are by D. Entekhabi (personal communication, 2007).
column of which we note that the covariance term of equation (3.15) may be neglected,
leaving
⟨
σI0
∣∣∣∣∣
d I0
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⟩
�−≈⎡
⎣⟨
σI0
⟩ ·⟨∣∣∣∣∣
d I0
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⟩⎤
⎦
�−
. (3.17)
This observation confirms our earlier assumption (see the paragraph following equa-
tion (3.12)) that the zonal climate is sufficiently homogeneous that at least its first two
moments are essentially the same for all pixels in a common zone, thereby ensuring
that the covariances of equation (3.16) are identically zero and, furthermore, that
⟨∣∣∣∣∣
d I0
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⟩
≈∣∣∣∣∣
d⟨
I0⟩
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1
. (3.18)
Abbreviating the range notation, as we have done earlier for the variance, and remem-
bering that (in this example) s is an inverse function of I0, equation (3.14) is, finally,
for negative d I0/d�,
⟨
Rs|�◦(�)⟩ ≈
for notational simplicity︷ ︸︸ ︷⟨
Rs|�◦(�)⟩ ≡ 〈Rs (�◦)〉 ≈ ns
⎡
⎣⟨
σI0
⟩ ·∣∣∣∣∣
d⟨
I0⟩
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⎤
⎦
�−︸ ︷︷ ︸
〈σs (�−)〉�◦ ≡ �− + ns
⟨
σs(�−)⟩
⎫
⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎬
⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎭
, (3.19)
and for positive d I0/d�,
⟨
Rs|�◦(�)⟩ ≈
for notational simplicity︷ ︸︸ ︷⟨
Rs|�◦(�)⟩ ≡ 〈Rs(�◦)〉 ≈ ns
⎡
⎣⟨
σI0
⟩ ·∣∣∣∣∣
d⟨
I0⟩
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⎤
⎦
�+︸ ︷︷ ︸
〈σs (�+)〉�◦ ≡ �+ − ns
⟨
σs(�+)⟩
⎫
⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎬
⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎭
. (3.20)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
42 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 3.6 Cumulative probability under the single-sided standardized normal probabilitydensity function. Adapted from Mosteller et al. [1961] and Benjamin and Cornell [1970].
Probability mass of the distribution of observed local species
If we knew the form of the pdf of the local species at a given latitude, and the
completeness (i.e., “percentage mass”) of Brockman’s [1968] identification of local
species there, we could specify the number, ns , of local species standard deviations
(from the mean species) within which this mass lies, a necessary and crucial factor of
equations (3.19) and (3.20). However, we do not have this information and must infer
it from the observed distribution of the local causative climate variable(s), which are
assumed to be limited to the SW flux in this work.
Assuming the bioclimatic function s = f (I0), as given by equation (3.2), to define
a locally linear and one-to-one transformation over the range of latitude implied by
the local fluctuations of I0 (see Figure 3.3), the pdf of s will be of the same type as
that of I0, although perhaps expanded, shrunken, or shifted, depending on what the
particular linear transformation f (I0) calls for at a given �. In such cases, letting nI
be the number of standard deviations of the I0 fluctuations (i.e., nI = (I0 − I0)/σI ),
if the probability distribution of I0 at a given latitude contains x% probability mass
at the distance nI σI0 from its mean, I0, then the probability distribution of s at that
latitude also has x% probability mass at the distance nsσs from the species mean, s. In
the special case of normal distributions (see Figure 3.6), a particular probability mass
is defined solely by n and therefore, by the preceding argument, a linear, one-to-one
transformation yields
ns ≡ nI . (3.21)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 43
Actually, ns is likely less than nI . The weakest of the I0 fluctuations may produce
species that are unstable for reasons unconsidered herein.
We continue our assumption of zonal homogeneity to assemble a large sample
of observed zonal fluctuations in annual SW flux, �I0 ≡ I0 − I0, by using the �I0
of each zonal land surface pixel during the daytime growing season of each of the
years of the satellite record. Histograms of these fluctuations at various latitudes in
North America are presented in Figure 3.7 as a function of nI , as determined by D.
Entekhabi (personal communication, 2007) at a later date, when a larger, 22 year
sample became available from the NASA-GISS ISCCP data set. Sample size for
30◦ ≤ � ≤ 70◦ in North America is thus between 220 and 110 (see Figure 2.2b).
Except at desert latitudes, � = 35◦ and � = 45◦, the histograms in Figure 3.7 are
sufficiently symmetrical about a central modal value to justify considering them, at
the current level of approximation, to be normal distributions albeit with truncated
tails. We indicate at each latitude in Figure 3.7 the approximate truncation value of nI
for the negative (i.e., left hand) side of the distribution, which we have assumed here
(see Figure 3.2) to be the fluctuations responsible for supporting the stable (and thus
observable) species on a one-to-one basis. With assumed normality and locally-linear
s = f (I0), ns ≡ nI , and we have all we need to estimate the range using equations
(3.19) and (3.20).
Analytical summary for climatic forcing by SW flux only
We have just seen (equations (3.19)–(3.20)) that the range of the modal species
at latitude �0 depends on the breadth of the species frequency distribution at �−
(or �+), which has been estimated using a series of linearization approximations
developed in earlier portions of this chapter. It is helpful to review the nature of these
approximations before testing their utility against the field observations of Brockman
[1968]. For species whose local existence is a function solely of the SW flux, and for
conditions of perfect zonal homogeneity (i.e., zonal averaging notation omitted), the
preceding analysis is summarized for negative d I0/d�,
Rs|�0 (�) = nsσ s|�−(�) = nsσs|�− (βLt )∣∣∣�βLt
��
∣∣∣
∣∣∣�0−�−
︸ ︷︷ ︸
a
≈nsσI0
∣∣∣
dβLt
d I0
∣∣∣�−
∣∣∣
dβLt
d I0
∣∣∣�−
·∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣�−
︸ ︷︷ ︸
b
= nsσI0∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣�−
≈ nI σI0∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣�−
︸ ︷︷ ︸
c
(3.22)
(note that (a) exact variable transformation, σs(βLt ) → σs(�), requires knowledge
of the “one-to-one” bioclimatic function, βLt (I0); �◦ − �− = nsσs(�−); (b) both
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
44 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 3.7 Histograms of observedpixel annual shortwave fluctuations in theNorthernHemi-sphere Americas, nI = (
I 0 − I 0)/σ I 0 (daytime, seasonal, land surface only; 22 year NASA–Goddard
Institute for Space Studies (GISS) International Satellite Cloud Climatology Project (ISCCP) data set;D. Entekhabi, personal communication, 2007).
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 45
numerator and denominator assume βLt (I0) is linear over the local range �0 − �−,
and the denominator assumes I0(�) to be linear over �0 − �− also; and (c) this
assumes normal distribution of I0, making ns = nI at common percentage mass due
to the linearizations of b), and for positive d I0/d�,
Rs|�0 (�) = nsσ s|�+(�) = nsσs|�+ (βLt )∣∣∣�βLt
��
∣∣∣
∣∣∣�+−�0
︸ ︷︷ ︸
a
≈nsσI0
∣∣∣
dβLt
d I0
∣∣∣�+
∣∣∣
dβLt
d I0
∣∣∣�+
·∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣�+
︸ ︷︷ ︸
b
= nsσI0∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣�+
≈ nI σI0∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣�+
︸ ︷︷ ︸
c
(3.23)
(note that (a) exact variable transformation, σs(βLt ) → σs(�), requires knowledge
of the “one-to-one” bioclimatic function, βLt (I0); �+ − �0 = nsσs(
�+); (b) both
numerator and denominator assume βLt (I0) to be linear over the local range, �+ −�0, and the denominator assumes I0(�) to be linear over �+ − �0 also; and (c)
this assumes normal distribution of I0, making ns = nI at common percentage mass
due to the linearizations of b). The case of d I0/
d� = 0 will be considered later (in
Figure 3.16) for both maxima and minima of I0.
Point-by-point estimation of range versus observationfor North America
In Figure 3.8, we plot, for the land surface pixels of North America, the ob-
served functions⟨
I0⟩ = f I (�) and
⟨
σI0
⟩ = gσI (�), along with (from Figure 3.7)
nI ≈ ns = hn(�), all as determined by D. Entekhabi (personal communication, 2007)
from the 17 year (22 year for nI ) NASA-GISS satellite data set. Note in Figure 3.8 that
for all North American latitudes, d I0/
d� is negative, and with increasing latitude,
all three of the plotted climate variables display observed “wavelike” oscillations.
We will demonstrate the necessity of filtering these oscillations to obtain the mono-
tonic increase of range with latitude displayed in Figure 1.1a by the observations of
Brockman [1968].
Letting � = �−, the plotted values of⟨
I0⟩
and⟨
σI0
⟩
from Figure 3.8 are listed
in columns 2 and 3 of Table 3.2. The absolute value of the latitudinal gradient of⟨
I0⟩
is given in column 4, as determined by differentials from columns 1 and 2, and
the standard deviation of local species,⟨
σs(�−)⟩
, is found through equation (3.8).
Referring to Table 3.2, we now estimate the local ranges by two methods.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
46 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 3.8 Piecewise latitudinal linearization of the components of local species range inNorth America (17 year NASA-GISS ISCCP data set; D. Entekhabi, personal communication, 2007).
1. The first method is point-by-point for all variables. With nI = ns , we interpolate
values of nI (column 6) at the desired values of �− (column 1) and calculate the
modal range at �◦ (column 8) using equation (3.19). The value of �◦ is then given
in column 10 from column 1 plus column 8, as called for in the second part of
equation (3.19). Finally, these modal ranges are plotted at their latitudinal locations
in Figure 3.9 using the open diamond symbol, where they may be compared with the
observations of Brockman [1968] shown by solid dots with error bars. Note that north
of the desert latitudes, they show the range gradient to be of the proper sign and the
range magnitudes to be within about ±20% of the observed.
2. The second method is point-by-point for all but nI . Recognizing that nI proba-
bly contains the most error due to our assumption of zonal homogeneity, we remove
its oscillations, seen in Figure 3.8, by using the average value, n I = 2.9, listed at
all latitudes in column 7 of Table 3.2 and corresponding to a normal probability
mass of 99.5%, as shown in Figure 3.6. (Note in this figure that for a normal prob-
ability mass of 99.7%, nI = ns = 4.0, illustrating the exquisite sensitivity of the
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
TABLE
3.2
Estim
ationof
theLatitud
inalRa
ngeof
theLo
calM
odalSp
eciesin
North
America(North
American
Land
SurfaceZo
nalA
verage
From
the
NASA
-GISSISCC
PDataSe
t;17
Yearsof
Record,196
4–20
00)a
�−
⟨ I 0⟩ b
⟨ σI 0
⟩ b∣ ∣ �
⟨ I 0⟩/
��
∣ ∣c⟨ σ
s( �
−)⟩ d
⟨ Rs| �
0(�
)⟩ g⟨ R
s| �0(�
)⟩ h�
◦i�
◦j
(◦N)
(Wtotm
−2)
(Wtotm
−2)
(Wtotm
−2de
g−1)
(deg
)nIe
nf I
(deg
)(deg
)(◦N)
(◦N)
12
34
56
78
910
11
2649
7.2
11.9
3.4
2.9
3147
3.7
9.9
4.59
2.16
2.8
2.9
6.0
6.3
37.0
37.3
3645
1.3
10.9
5.77
1.89
2.6
2.9
4.9
5.5
40.9
41.5
4141
6.0
10.8
6.28
1.72
2.3
2.9
4.0
5.0
45.0
46.0
4638
8.5
11.9
6.30
1.89
2.4
2.9
4.5
5.5
50.5
51.5
5135
3.0
12.9
6.06
2.13
3.2
2.9
6.8
6.2
57.8
57.2
5632
7.9
12.9
5.38
2.39
3.8
2.9
9.1
6.9
65.1
62.9
6129
9.2
12.3
3.5
aGrowingseason
asestim
ated
inTable
2.2foreach
latitud
e.Po
int-by
-point
andaverag
ed-n
Icurves
areplotted
byop
endiam
onds
andop
en
circlesin
Figu
re3.9,respectiv
ely.
bFrom
observations
(Tab
le2.4).
c Differen
cesfrom
columns
1an
d2.
dEq
uatio
n(3.8):column3
÷column4.
e Point-by-point,Figures
3.7an
d3.8.
f Average
dn l:Figures
3.7an
d3.8.
gPo
int-by
-point
with
interpolated
n l:colum
n5
×column6.
h Average
dn l:colum
n5
×column7.
i Point-by-point
with
interpolated
n l:colum
n1
+column8.
j Average
dn l:colum
n1
+column9.
47
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
48 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 3.9 Latitudinal distribution of the mean latitudinal range of local species in NorthAmerica: point-by-point estimation.
estimated range to the estimated value of this parameter.) With this sole change,
we repeat the calculation of modal range and its location, as listed in columns 9
and 11 of Table 3.2. These are plotted in Figure 3.9 using the open circle symbol,
where they are numbered 1–6 and may be compared with both the observations and
with the (completely) point-by-point values of the open diamond symbol. Note the
similar results in the desert latitudes but, now, how nearly perfectly points 3–6 of the
predictions (open circles), using nI = n I , track the observations over the latitudes
46◦N ≤ � ≤ 63◦N.
We note the following from Figure 3.9.
1. For latitudes between 46◦N and (at least) 63◦N, our “zeroth-order,” point-by-
point estimator of local ranges is quite accurate in North America, provided we use
the average of the estimated local nI .
2. For latitudes 46◦N ≤ � < 63◦N (at least) in North America, the point-by-point
estimates of range (using average nI ) appear to lie on a straight line (short dashes),
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 49
which, when fitted by linear “least squares,” has a slope d Rs/d� = 0.11 and passes
very close to the origin, Rs = 0, � = 0, as it intercepts the zero-range axis at � < 1◦.
In the next section, we will conduct a Gedankenexperiment, which leads to a physical
requirement that the linear projection of high-latitude species range pass precisely
through the range-latitude origin, (0,0).
3. For latitudes 37◦N ≤ � < 46◦N (at least) in North America, either estimator
seriously overestimates the range. This may be due to our assumption in arriving
at equation (3.19) that the range is controlled solely by SW flux. Indeed, we note
in Figure 3.9 that the latitudes between about 22◦N and 45◦N contain the North
American deserts [Strahler, 1971], where we expect the availability of water to be
vegetation limiting, and we have made no attempt here to include this variable in the
analysis.
4. We have demonstrated, through smoothing of the wavelike latitudinal variations
of nI , that our estimate of range is dramatically improved north of the desert region
in North America. This suggests that some sort of meridional smoothing of all the
variables composing the range estimate may reduce (or even eliminate) the excursion
of range we predict between 37◦N and 46◦N from the point-by-point analysis made
using equation (3.19). We explore this tactic in a later section of this chapter.
5. There are insufficient land surface pixels at the lower latitudes of North America
to generate stable theoretical ranges at �◦ ≤ 30◦N, and there are no Brockman [1968]
observations there either. Were there adequate numbers of land surface pixels equator-
ward of the deserts, it would seem reasonable to expect our SW-flux-based estimator
to regain its accuracy near the equator only if we used a higher-order approximation
that accounts for the curvature of the bioclimatic function.
6. If the other Northern Hemisphere land surfaces behave at least qualitatively in
the same manner as those of North America, we may gain insight into the latitu-
dinal variations of range at �◦ < 46◦N through a similar analysis of the Northern
Hemisphere climate data. We explore this also in a later section of this chapter.
A thought experiment on the variation of SW fluxin an isotropic atmosphere
Imagine a world in which vegetation responds everywhere solely to the SW flux
and that (to the zeroth order) the average growing-season value of this flux has
the value at high latitude associated there with the autumnal equinox in the real
world. Imagine further that the atmosphere in this world has everywhere the same
atmospheric moisture content (i.e., specific humidity) found at the higher latitudes
of the real world [Peixoto and Oort, 1992, Figure 12.6]. We might then expect a
surface SW flux that increases linearly with falling latitude only at high latitudes on
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
50 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 3.10 Global pixel SW flux in an imaginary, low-moisture atmosphere: a“thought experiment” (daytime at autumnal equinox; 22 year NASA-GISS ISCCP data set;D. Entekhabi, personal communication, 2007).
real-world land surfaces to be found at all latitudes on land surfaces in our imaginary
world. Furthermore, at the autumnal equinox, we might expect this SW flux to be
symmetrical about the equator in this imaginary world.
Turn now to Figure 3.10, in which these real and imaginary conditions are illus-
trated: the highest, continuous, “sinusoidal” curve gives the SW flux at the top of the
atmosphere (identical in both the real and imaginary worlds), while the lower contin-
uous curve (the Americas) and dashed curve (global) give the SW flux at the surface
of the real world, all at the autumnal equinox, as given in the 22 year NASA-GISS
ISCCP data set (D. Entekhabi, personal communication, 2007). The SW flux at the
surface in our imaginary, “dry atmosphere” world is set, as a boundary condition of
this Gedankenexperiment, to be identical to that of the real world at high latitudes,
which is seen by the fitted dash-dotted line in Figure 3.10, to fall linearly with increas-
ing latitude above about 40◦N and 40◦S. Note that the values of 〈 I0〉 at the surface are
a decreasing percentage of those at the top of the atmosphere with increasing latitude.
This is due both to the increasing percentage of temporal-average cloud cover (see
Peixoto and Oort [1992, Figure 7.29], using data from Berliand and Strokina [1980])
and to the increasing length of the SW flux path in the atmosphere, for this season
above about 35◦N and 35◦S. Below this latitude, in both hemispheres, the real-world
surface SW flux is relatively constant between 400 and 500 Wtot m−2. This is due
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 51
to the high cloud albedo resulting from the high atmospheric moisture content that
increases toward the equator [Peixoto and Oort, 1992, Figure 12.6a], aided by the
intense (and “homogenizing”) convective vertical mixing at these latitudes. It seems
reasonable to assume that with the imaginary atmosphere being dry globally, the
imaginary surface SW flux would continue to rise linearly for � < 40◦N and 40◦S
at the autumnal equinox. Accordingly, we project the dash-dotted line of Figure 3.10
to the equator in each hemisphere at the slope established at � < 40◦N and 40◦S by
the real-world dry atmosphere at these latitudes. Note that at the autumnal equinox,
these projections meet almost exactly at the equator (as they should), giving a clear
maximum SW flux there of about 850 Wtot m−2 and a pleasing symmetry to our
imaginary world at this season.
To draw from this thought experiment a conclusion helpful to our understanding of
species range in the real world, we look back at Figure 2.3 to see that the gradients of
〈I0〉 from the land surfaces in the higher latitudes of both hemispheres, when averaged
both zonally and temporally over essentially the entire year (i.e., days 8 to 338) and
projected back to the equator, also intersect there. Can there be a connection between
this observation and our theoretical finding (Figure 3.9) that the linear least squares
fit of predicted point-by-point ranges over these same latitudes also projects back to
zero at the equator? To answer this, we look ahead to Figure 3.16 and equation (3.41).
Range of modal species at maxima andminimaof the SW flux
Skipping ahead to Figure 3.16 for the moment (and neglecting the numbers thereon
until later), we consider what maxima and minima of I0(�) imply for species range.
Look first at the maximum of I0(�), as sketched in Figure 3.16b, where the species-
supportive half of the I0 distribution (refer to Figure 3.3 or 3.4) is sketched at latitudes
below, at, and above that maximum. Note that there is no latitude on either the rising
or falling limb of this curve at which the distribution of I0 will contain a value equal to
or larger than the modal value in the distribution at the maximum of I0(�). Referring
to Figure 3.16b, this means that the range of all peak I0 is identically zero.
A numerically similar situation applies with respect to the modal species, s, which
we have seen (equation (3.2)) to rise monotonically with falling I0. This means that
there is no latitude on either the falling or rising limb of the cup-shaped s(�) curve
(i.e., the inverse of I0(�)) at which the distribution of s will contain a stable value
equal to or less than the smallest value, s, at �oo. The (continuous) range of the modal
stable species associated with this maximum of I0(�) is therefore always zero. On the
other hand, as is shown clearly in Figure 3.16a, using similar reasoning, the sketched
distributions allow for finite continuous range of the modal species around a local
minimum of I0(�).
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
52 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 3.11 Latitudinal distribution of the mean latitudinal range of local species in NorthAmerica: mean gradient estimation.
We have seen that I0 in the high, “dry-atmosphere” latitudes, when averaged over
either the single month surrounding the autumnal equinox (Figure 3.10) or over
essentially the full year (Figure 2.3), projects to a maximum at the equator. In light
of the preceding, we now have a theoretical basis for projecting the theoretical range
gradient at high (and dry) latitudes in the real world back through the range-latitude
origin, (0,0), and thereby fixing the gradient in Rs, � space.
Gradient estimation of range versus observation for North America
The quasi-linear variation of range with latitude displayed by Brockman’s [1968] ob-
servations, as reproduced again in Figure 3.11, suggests that estimating the gradient of
range, rather than the point-by-point ranges, may provide additional helpful smooth-
ing of the observed oscillations in the independent parameters seen in Figure 3.8.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 53
This gradient is obtained from the derivative of the final form of equation (3.19) as
d Rs|�0 (�)
d�=∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣ d(
nI⟨
σI0
⟩)/
d� − nI⟨
σI0
⟩
d∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣
/
d�∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣
2 , (3.24)
in which (see Figure 3.8) d∣∣d⟨
I0⟩/
d�∣∣/
d� ∼= 0 for � ≥ 26◦N. Note that the gra-
dient of range is independent of the sense of βLt ( I0). Over these latitudes, equation
(3.24) is then
d Rs|�0 (�)
d�= nI d
⟨
σI0
⟩
/d� + ⟨σI0
⟩
dnI /d�∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣
, � ≥ 26◦N. (3.25)
As a further smoothing, we average this gradient of range over � ≥ 26◦N, while
neglecting the resulting covariances as being small, giving the approximation
[d Rs|�0 (�)
d�
]
∼= n I d⟨
σI0
⟩
/d� + ⟨σI0
⟩
dnI /d�∣∣d I0
/
d�∣∣
, � ≥ 26◦N, (3.26)
in which, as used here, the double overbar signifies averaging over latitude. From
the latitudinal variations in nI and⟨
σI0
⟩
seen in Figure 3.8, we see that the range
� ≥ 26◦N should be broken up into two continuous segments, 26◦ ≤ � ≤ 35◦ and
35◦ ≤ � ≤ 65◦, and we apply equation (3.26) separately to each of these.
We evaluate the mean gradients in equation (3.26) using a linear least squares
fitting to the observed climate variables, as shown by the dashed straight lines in
Figure 3.8, obtaining
North America:
⎧
⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎨
⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎩
∣∣d⟨
I0⟩
/d�∣∣ = 5.82
d⟨
σI0
⟩
/d� = 0.082
dnI /d� = 0.031
⎫
⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎬
⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎭
, � ≥ 35◦, (3.27)
and by the solid straight lines, obtaining
North America:
⎧
⎪⎨
⎪⎩
d⟨
σI0
⟩/
d� = 0
dnI/
d� = 0
⎫
⎪⎬
⎪⎭
, 26◦ ≤ � ≤ 35◦. (3.28)
The mean point values (solid lines in Figure 3.8) give
North America:
⎧
⎨
⎩
n I = 2.93
⟨
σI0
⟩ = 11.95
⎫
⎬
⎭, � ≥ 35◦ (3.29)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
54 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
and (dashed lines for σI0 ; solid line for nI )
North America:
⎧
⎪⎨
⎪⎩
d⟨
σI0
⟩/
d� = 0
dnI/
d� = 0
⎫
⎪⎬
⎪⎭
, 26◦ ≤ � ≤ 35◦. (3.30)
Using equations (3.25) and (3.26), equation (3.24) yields, for North America,
[d Rs|�0 (�)
d�
]
≈ (2.93) (0.082) + (11.95) (0.031)
(5.82)= 0.105, � ≥ 35◦, (3.31)
which is close to the same value, 0.11, found in Figure 3.9 from linear least squares
fitting of the point-by-point-calculated ranges numbered 3–6. To make use of the
preceding result for estimating the mean range at a given latitude, we need to locate
d R/
d� vertically in the space of Figure 3.11, to which end we use the results of our
thought experiment:
R ps|�0 (� = 0) = 0, (3.32)
which is a point on the projection of the latitudinal gradient of range in the high-
latitude region of low atmospheric moisture (estimated here to be � ≥ 45◦) and is
plotted as the open triangle at the origin in Figure 3.11.
We now use equations (3.31) and (3.32) to plot our a priori, gradient-based estimate
of high-latitude range as the solid line for � ≥ 45◦ in Figure 3.11, in comparison with
Brockman’s [1968] North American observations for 29◦ ≤ � ≤ 70◦. We see there, a
posteriori, that equations (3.31) and (3.32) are actually quite accurate over the larger
span 35◦ ≤ � ≤ 70◦, and we extend the solid line accordingly. Furthermore, using
equations (3.26) and (3.28), the range gradient is zero for 26◦ ≤ � ≤ 35◦, and when
matched to the range given by equation (3.31) at � = 35◦, the forecast range picks up
the Brockman-observed flattening in the middle latitudes and thereby demonstrates its
utility over the full range of vegetated land surface in North America, 26◦ ≤ � ≤ 70◦.
The remarkable ability of this gradient analysis (Figure 3.11) to predict not only
the gradient, but also the magnitude of range over essentially the entire span of
vegetated North American latitudes, while the point-by-point predictions (Figure 3.9)
diverge sharply from observation for � < 45◦, suggests that the form of the point-by-
point estimator (equation (3.22)) at these lower latitudes may be incorrect. Perhaps
it is dependent on a different primary forcing variable (available moisture at these
latitudes?) but independent of latitude. We will investigate this issue further as we
consider the entire Northern Hemisphere, where we have more low-latitude land
surface.
We now perform the same point-by-point and gradient estimates of range over the
entire Northern Hemisphere, although we have no Northern Hemisphere observations
outside of North America with which to compare the estimates.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 55
FIGURE 3.12 Histograms of observed pixel annual shortwave fluctuations in the NorthernHemisphere, nI = (
I 0 − I 0)/σ I 0 (daytime, seasonal, land surface only; 22 year NASA-GISS ISCCP
data set; D. Entekhabi, personal communication, 2007).
Point-by-point estimation of range versus observationfor the Northern Hemisphere
The histograms of land surface pixel fluctuations of SW flux in six latitudinal zones of
the Northern Hemisphere are presented in Figure 3.12, as prepared by D. Entekhabi
(personal communication, 2007), again from the 22 year NASA-GISS data set. Note
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
56 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
TABLE 3.3 Estimation of the Latitudinal Range of the Local Modal Species in theNorthern Hemisphere (Northern Hemisphere Land Surface Zonal Average From theNASA-GISS Radiative Flux Data Set; 17 Years of Record, 1984–2000)
�− 〈 I 0〉 ≡ ⟨I 0
⟩a ∣∣�⟨I 0
⟩/��
∣∣b ⟨σ I 0
⟩c ⟨σs
(�−)⟩d 〈Rs (�◦)〉 f �◦g
(◦N) (Wtot m−2) (Wtot m−2 deg−1) (Wtot m−2) (deg) ni = ns e (deg) (deg)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
22.5 1.3 10.6 8.15 (3.0) 24.5 47.025 484.4 3.027.5 3.1 12.2 3.9 (3.0) 11.7 39.230 481.3 2.8 11.9 4.25 (3.0) 12.8 42.832.5 3.8 12.3 3.2 (3.0) 9.6 42.135 469.0 5.0 12.7 2.54 3.2 8.1 43.137.5 6.0 13.2 2.2 (4.0) 8.8 46.340 438.5 (4.0)42.5 6.6 14.0 2.09 (4.0) 8.4 50.945 404.0 4.047.5 6.2 14.9 2.40 (4.0) 9.6 57.150 361.5 (4.0)52.5 5.2 15.7 3.01 (4.0) 12.0 64.555 335.0 4.6 16.2 3.51 4.0 14.0 69.057.5 324.0 4.5 16.6 3.69 (4.0)60 315.4 6.6 17.0 2.58 (4.0) 10.3 70.365 269.2 4.0
aFrom observations, Table 2.3.bDifferences from columns 1 and 2.cFrom smoothed observations; Figure 3.13. Growing season as estimated in Table 2.2 for each latitude.dFrom equation (3.8).eFrom Figure 3.12. Parentheses indicate interpolation.f Column 5 × column 6.gColumn 1 + column 7.
the significant departures of these distributions from normality in the desert latitudes,
15◦N < � < 45◦N, which violate an important assumption of equation (3.21). For
North America (Figure 3.7), we have seen this violation to be much less severe and over
a more northerly range of the desert latitudes there (25◦N < � < 55◦N). However,
having noted this problem, we disregard it at the present order of approximation, and
we indicate our associated estimates of nI ≈ ns for the Northern Hemisphere in Table
3.3 and Figure 3.12.
The remaining parameters of equations (3.19) and (3.20) are presented in Fig-
ure 3.13. There we plot, for the land surface pixels of the entire Northern Hemi-
sphere, the observed functions⟨
I0⟩ = f I0 (�) and
⟨
σI0
⟩ = gσI (�), as determined by
D. Entekhabi (personal communication, 2007) from the 17 year NASA-GISS data
set, along with nI ≈ ns = hn(�) from Figure 3.12.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 57
FIGURE 3.13 Piecewise latitudinal linearization of the components of local species range in theNorthern Hemisphere (22 year NASA-GISS ISCCP data set; D. Entekhabi, personal communication,2007).
Letting � = �−, the plotted values of⟨
I0⟩
,⟨
σI0
⟩
, and nI ≈ ns are listed in columns
2, 4, and 6 of Table 3.3. The estimated zonal average modal species range, 〈Rs|�0 (�)〉,and latitude �0 for latitudes � ≥ 35◦ in the Northern Hemisphere are given in columns
7 and 8 of Table 3.3 and are plotted as the open circles in Figure 3.14, where they
are compared with Brockman’s [1968] observations in North America. The points
labeled a1, a2, b, c, and d, plotted using the symbol ⊕ in Figure 3.14, are special cases
resulting from the presence of zero gradients of the SW flux function,⟨
I0⟩ = f I0 (�)
(Figure 3.14), which dominate the formation of continuous range at all latitudes
� < 35◦. Because of the changing gradients and overlapping influences in these
latitudes, calculation of the ranges there does not lend itself to tabular presentation
and is therefore missing from Table 3.3. Instead, using observed values from Figure
3.13, the ranges are reasoned from reference to the generalizations of both maxima
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
58 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 3.14 Latitudinal distribution of themean latitudinal range of local species in theNorth-ern Hemisphere: point-by-point estimation.
and minima presented in Figure 3.15 and then are plotted directly in Figure 3.14.
Beginning at the equator, we describe their estimation as follows.
For ⊕a1—on either side of a minimum in the local mean SW flux, such as at
the equator in Figure 3.13 (enlarged but not to scale in Figure 3.16a), the mean SW
flux rises. According to the fundamental assumption of this work, as summarized
in Figure 3.4, only the species that are larger than the local mean species are stable
locally and hence are available to be observed and counted. Such “stable” species are
supported by those fluctuating annual local SW fluxes that are smaller than the local
mean SW flux. We thus show in Figure 3.16a the range-determining portion of the
local SW flux distribution as extending below the function⟨
I0⟩ = f I0 (�). With our
central assumptions, equal species are found at equal I0, so the mean species at the
equator (� = �0 = 0) are found within the I0 distributions at all latitudes between
the equator and � = �+, the latitude at which I +0 − nI σI +
0= I 0
0 , a trial solution.
The continuous range of the modal species at the equator will have branches on both
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 59
FIGURE 3.15 Latitudinal distribution of themean latitudinal range of local species in theNorth-ern Hemisphere: mean gradient estimation.
sides of � = �0 = 0, but here we consider only that portion, RN (�0), that would be
observed in the northern latitudes. The successful trial solution for this portion of the
equatorial range is shown in Figure 3.16a (top) as RN (�0) = �+ − 0 = 9◦.
For ⊕a2—between � = 0◦ and � = 9◦, all the constituents of range nI , σI0 , and∣∣d I0/d�
∣∣ are approximately constant (see Figure 3.13); thus we expect the range to
be constant over this latitudinal span.
For ⊕c—on either side of a maximum in the local mean SW flux, such as at
� = �00 ≈ 17.5◦N in Figure 3.13 (enlarged but not to scale in Figure 3.16b), the
mean SW flux falls. Once again, our basic assumptions have stable local species
supported by those fluctuations in the local annual SW flux that are smaller than the
local mean SW flux, and we show, in Figure 3.16b, that side of the local distribution
of fluctuations in SW flux at �00, where the mean SW flux is at its maximum, I 0
0 , and
at the two flanking latitudes, �0L and �0
R , where the smaller mean SW flux is identical
and equal to I 00 − nI σI 0
0. It follows that the range of the modal species at a maximum
is zero.
For ⊕b, d—there will be equal peaks in the continuous range at the two latitudes
�0L and �0
R (⊕b and ⊕d, respectively) flanking �00 (at ⊕c). To evaluate �0
L and �0R ,
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
60 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
we first calculate nI σI 00
= 26 Wtot m−2 and subtract it from I 00 = 496 Wtot m−2 to get
I L0 = I R
0 = 470 Wtot m−2, which are located in latitude (from Figure 3.13) at 9◦ and
35◦, respectively. The continuous range at these limiting latitudes is given by their
difference, 26◦, and is plotted accordingly in Figure 3.14.
Point-by-point estimates of the ranges at latitudes � ≥ 35◦ in the Northern Hemi-
sphere are estimated as before for North America, and that process can be followed
in Table 3.3. The resulting ranges are plotted in Figure 3.14 using open circles,
and they show discontinuities as well as a wild oscillation apparently forced by the
corresponding large oscillations in⟨
σI0
⟩
seen in Figure 3.13.
Gradient estimation of range versus observationfor the Northern Hemisphere
Beginning as in North America and noting (Figure 3.13) that in the Northern Hemi-
sphere, for � ≥ 35◦, d∣∣d⟨
I0⟩/
d�∣∣/
d� ∼= 0 and dnI /d� = 0, equation (3.26) re-
duces to
[d Rs|�0 (�)
d�
]
≈ n I d⟨
σI0
⟩
/d�∣∣d I0
/
d�∣∣
, � ≥ 35◦N. (3.33)
We fit the⟨
I0⟩
and⟨
σI0
⟩
observations of Figure 3.13 using the linear least squares
method, and the nI by simple averaging, to obtain
Northern Hemisphere:
⎧
⎪⎪⎪⎨
⎪⎪⎪⎩
n I∼= 4.0
d⟨
σI0
⟩
/d� = 0.17
∣∣d⟨
I0⟩
/d�∣∣ = 6.55
⎫
⎪⎪⎪⎬
⎪⎪⎪⎭
, � ≥ 35◦N , (3.34)
which, with equation (3.33), gives
[d Rs|�0 (�)
d�
]
≈ (4.0)(0.17)
(6.55)= 0.104, � ≥ 35◦N. (3.35)
Repeating the previous thought experiment, equation (3.35) must pass through
the origin of Rs|�0 (�), as indicated by the open triangle in Figure 3.15, and we find
equation (3.35) to describe Brockman’s [1968] observations of the mean local species
ranges for � ≥ 35◦ in North America with reasonable accuracy. We note the closeness
of the Northern Hemisphere gradient of range, 0.104, to the 0.105 of North America
(equation (3.31)) and will return to this finding in the next section.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 61
FIGURE 3.16 Estimation of the SW flux-dependent species range at maxima and minima ofI 0(�).
Continuing the gradient analysis for � < 35◦, we have
Northern Hemisphere:
⎧
⎪⎪⎪⎨
⎪⎪⎪⎩
n I = 3.0
d⟨
σI0
⟩
/d� = 0.17
∣∣d⟨
I0⟩
/d�∣∣ = 1.52
⎫
⎪⎪⎪⎬
⎪⎪⎪⎭
, 17.5◦ ≤ � < 35◦ , (3.36)
which, with equation (3.33), gives
[d Rs|�0 (�)
d�
]
≈ (3.0)(0.17)
(1.52)= 0.34, 17.5◦ ≤ � < 35◦, (3.37)
which, assuming continuous R, makes Rs|�0 (�) = 0 at
� = 35◦ − Rs (35◦) /0.34 = 35◦ − 3.6/0.34 = 24.4◦.
For 0◦ ≤ � ≤ 17.5◦, we see in Figure 3.13 that d⟨
σI0
⟩
/d� ∼= 0, and although
we have only one observation of nI in this region, comparison with observations at
higher � suggest that it is reasonable to assume that dnI /d� = 0 also over this range
of low �. Hence, over these low latitudes, it appears as though the gradient as given
by equation (3.29) maintains Rs|�0 (�) = 0. To emphasize the uncertainty in these
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
62 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
reasonings, the two low-latitude gradients are plotted in Figure 3.15 as the (short)
dashed lines.
The similarity of the estimated range gradients for North America (Figure 3.9) and
for the whole Northern Hemisphere (Figure 3.11) at � ≥ 35◦ lead us to conclude that
the species ranges in the Northern Hemisphere are relatively insensitive to longitude
over these latitudes. However, the point-by-point estimates of range do not match the
gradient estimates for � ≥ 35◦ in the Northern Hemisphere, as they did in North
America (see Figure 3.9, as compared with Figure 3.14), and neither the point-by-
point nor the gradient estimates appear adequate at � < 35◦ with SW flux as the sole
climatic forcing. We conclude that for � < 35◦, the Northern Hemisphere ranges
vary in an as yet unexplained manner, which may be due to the unaccounted for local
nonlinearity there and/or the influence, beyond that of insolation, of one or more
additional forcing variables.
Low-latitude smoothing of range by latitudinal averagingof the growing season
We empirically discovered, through our thought experiment in Figure 3.10, that lat-
itudinally averaging the surface shortwave flux during the growing season to every-
where be that at autumnal equinox (22 September) explained well the positioning of
the observed gradient of range at high latitude, � ≥ 35◦N, as shown by the latter’s
imaginary projection through Rs = 0, � = 0 in Figures 3.11 (North America) and
3.15 (Northern Hemisphere). We now extend this use of the “equinoctial growing
season” to the low latitudes, � < 35◦N, where the gradient appears to be flattening,
although we have only one guiding range observation. However, Figure 3.10 shows
the surface shortwave flux to be “noisily” variable about an approximately constant
value of I0 ≈ 480 Wtot m−2 over the latitudes 0◦ ≤ � ≤ 35◦N, as is indicated by the
horizontal dashed line at those latitudes in that figure. What does this mean for the
continuous range of particular species over these latitudes?
In the appendices, we develop the form of the bioclimatic function βLt = g(
I0)
(for primary canopies), relating local average species to local average surface short-
wave flux. Because the local seasonal-average shortwave flux is a unique function
of local latitude, so then will the local average species be a unique function of local
latitude. Over the latitudes of present concern, 0◦ ≤ � ≤ 35◦N, the previously noted
small continuous latitudinal oscillation of the equinoctial-average I0 will produce a
small continuous latitudinal oscillation in both the local modal species and its range.
This latitudinal oscillation prevents the local modal species from being identical
across these latitudes.
We propose here that it is physically unrealistic for either the local modal species
or its range to be discontinuous at any latitude, and thus the range at � = 35◦N(−)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 63
must equal that at � = 35◦N(+), with the latter being given by the gradient analysis
in Figure 3.16 to be Rs (35◦N) ∼= 3.6◦. At � = 35◦N (−) and below, we assume a
meridionally homogeneous equinoctial climate, dominated by vertical convective
mixing in which both range-controlling variables, σI0 and I0 are assumed to be
meridionally constant. Consistent with the accuracy of this entire work, the local
range at each latitude 0◦ ≤ � ≤ 35◦N will then be taken as constant at the value
Rs (35◦N) ∼= 3.6◦ and is shown by the horizontal solid line over those latitudes in
Figure 3.16.
Alternatively, we note that at low latitudes, the equinoctial average (Figure 3.10)
gives d I0/d� = 0, and using seasonal averages (Figure 3.13) dnI σI0/d� = 0, equa-
tion (3.25) leads to an indeterminate-range gradient if forced everywhere solely by
SW flux. One is led thereby to the conclusion that other factors may control species
selection in these tropical latitudes, and even that the selection process there is not
neutral [Hubbell, 2001], as we have assumed herein, but instead varies with species
at a given location. In support of this alternative view, Kraft et al. [2008] present
evidence supporting a nonneutral view of tropical forest dynamics, in which co-
occurring species display different ecological strategies. More will be said about such
tropical nonneutrality relative to both range and richness in chapter 4.
Range as a reflection of the bioclimatic dispersion of species
Because the mean light decreases with latitude above 17.5◦N in the Northern Hemi-
sphere, and thus through the bioclimatic function (equation (3.2)), the “size” of the
modal species, βLt , increases over these latitudes (Figure 3.3), and because we rea-
son (Figure 3.4) that only those species larger than the modal will exist locally, the
local modal species at one of these latitudes will be found also and exclusively at all
lesser latitudes southward to the latitude at which that particular species is locally the
“largest,” but given a normal distribution of “sizes,” is the least numerous (Figure 3.5).
This seems to indicate that under the current climate, the seeds of these local modal
species could not have originated at latitudes outside their respective current ranges.
Probabilistically, each species is most likely to have evolved at or near its respective
modal latitude, that is, where the frequency of its occurrence is maximum. Subse-
quently, its seeds have been carried to other latitudes, northward or southward, by
some fluid and/or animal agents. Restricting consideration for the moment to lati-
tudes above 17.5◦N in the Northern Hemisphere, the seeds of modal species carried
northward from their modal latitude into a regime of lower light cannot yield viable
plants, according to the theory put forth here (Figures 3.3 and 3.4). However, those
deposited and germinated southward of their modal latitude, where their seedlings
are “stable” (see Figure 3.4), will mature in decreasing local frequency with distance
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
64 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
from the latitude of their modal rank. This latitudinal span, from being the smallest
but most numerous (i.e., modal) local species at its northernmost location, �0, to
being the largest and least numerous (i.e., extreme) local species at its southernmost
location, �−, is, of course, the modal species’ range as we have defined it earlier in
this chapter.
For latitudes 0◦ ≤ � ≤ 17.5◦N, and using the latitudinally variable season length
of Table 2.2, I0 increases with � (Figure 3.13), the modal species decreases with �
(Figure 3.4), and the modal species at a given latitude will be dispersed northward
(imagine a mirror image of Figure 3.5).
From the observations available, we have found the extent of the southward latitu-
dinal bioclimatic dispersion of local modal species for � > 17.5◦N (i.e., the “range”
Rs(�)) to increase linearly with increasing latitude at latitudes greater than 35◦N; that
is, from equation (3.26), with the zonal averaging notation omitted for simplicity, the
range gradient, a dimensionless number, is written
d Rs(�)
d�=∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣ d(
nI σI0
)/
d� − nI σI0 d∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣
/
d�∣∣∣
d I0d�
∣∣∣
2 . (3.38)
For the set of observed conditions, that is, both constant,∣∣d I0/d�
∣∣, and positive, ��,
equation (3.38) becomes
d Rs(�)
d�= d
(
nI σI0
)/
d�∣∣d I0
/
d�∣∣
=∣∣∣∣∣
d(
nI σI0
)
d I0
∣∣∣∣∣. (3.39)
We note that equation (3.39) is a mixture of local and spatial variabilities of SW
flux and as such displays a (weak) analogy with the dimensionless Schmidt number
found useful in categorizing the physics of mass dispersion in fluids and defined [Bird
et al., 2002] as
Schmidt number = (local) viscous momentum diffusivity
(convective) mass diffusivity. (3.40)
Remembering the direct connection theorized here between SW flux and stable
species, as manifested in equation (3.1) and displayed in Figure 3.5, we use equations
(3.3), (3.4), and (3.6), and note that ns = nI , to rewrite equation (3.39) for small
curvatures of s(�) in its species form:
E = d Rs(�)
d�=∣∣∣∣∣
d(
nI σI0
)
d I0
∣∣∣∣∣
∼=∣∣∣∣
d (nI σs)
ds
∣∣∣∣, (3.41)
to which we assign the symbol E , signifying a dimensionless ecodynamic parameter
governing the climatically induced latitudinal dispersion of C3 plant species due to
variabilities in light. We call E the bioclimatic dispersion parameter.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 65
This raises a question: is there some physical principle operating, perhaps in the
generic concept of such dispersion, to specify a critical and perhaps “universal”
value of this parameter? Such is often the case, of course, in physics, examples
being the value of unity for the Mach and Froude numbers, dividing regimes of
subcritical and supercritical flow, and the value of the Reynolds number, separating
laminar and turbulent flow regimes for particular geometric arrangements. These
examples all describe dynamic similarity of point (i.e., local) variability, whereas
dispersion imposes simultaneous spatial (i.e., convective) variability. This is exactly
what equation (3.41) does, and thus, for this dispersion process to be bioclimatically
similar from place to place, the value of E must be constant. Note once again that
this is not the mass dispersion characterized by equation (3.40); rather, it is species
dispersion caused by their selective forced emergence and stable support under the
combination of locally and latitudinally varying SW flux.
The magnitude of E , as evaluated from the climatic observations, is almost identical
for the continental land surface of North America (E = 0.105) and for the combined
continental land surfaces of the entire Northern Hemisphere (E = 0.104), even though
the components of the gradient (see equation (3.26)) are very different in the two cases
(equations (3.27) and (3.29) for North America; equation (3.34) for the Northern
Hemisphere). In addition, we can conclude from equation (3.41) that (1) if the variance
is the same at all latitudes and the mean light maintains a constant gradient (either
increasing or decreasing northward), the latitudinal gradient of range will vanish and
the range of the local modal species will be identical everywhere; (2) if the mean
light is the same at all latitudes and only the variance varies with latitude, the modal
species will be the same everywhere and its range will everywhere be the full span
of vegetated latitudes; (c) if the mean light decreases northward and the variance also
decreases northward, the range of the local modal species decreases northward; and
(d) if the mean light decreases northward and the variance increases northward, the
range of the local modal species increases northward without apparent limit.
These possible behaviors do not seem to reveal an optimum state and hence a
critical value for E . However, they do seem to indicate a convergence of the bioclimatic
dispersion at 17.5◦N.
A high-latitude shift in bioclimatic control from light to heat?
We now suggest that as the asymptotic limit of the bioclimatic function (equation (3.1))
is approached going northward, the control of 〈βLt〉 may begin to be shared with heat
because the ambient temperature falls below the evolutionary limit of first one and
then another species. We must recognize, then, that
βLt = f(
Io, T0)
, (3.42)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
66 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 3.17 Latitudinal distribution of atmospheric temperature at the surface.
whereupon, assuming that I0 and T0 are both functions only of latitude, equation
(3.42) yields
dβLt
d�= ∂βLt
∂ I0
d I0
d�+ ∂βLt
∂ T0
dT0
d�. (3.43)
We have assumed in chapter 2 that species selection/adaptation ensures that the
mean leaf temperature, T�, is equal not only to the ambient atmospheric temperature,
T0, but also to the temperature, Tm , at which photosynthesis is maximally efficient.
Larcher [1983, Figure 3.35] shows the temperature dependence of carbon assimilation
for a wide variety of woody C3 plants, from Arctic pine (Pinus cembra), for which
Tm = 15◦C, to an Australian arid bush (Acacia craspedocarpa), for which Tm =37◦C. Assuming both the geographical representativeness of these species and the
completeness of the range reported, we conclude that “full-growth” C3 forest (in the
sense of no temperature limitation to productivity) should be confined globally to
those latitudes at which the zonally averaged mean daylight-hour growing-season
temperature,⟨
T0⟩
, obeys
15◦C ≤ ⟨T0⟩ ≤ 37◦C. (3.44)
We present in Figure 3.17 a composite latitudinal distribution of observed av-
erage atmospheric temperatures at the surface in moist climates of the Northern
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
C H A P T E R 3 • M E A N L A T I T U D I N A L R A N G E O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 67
Hemisphere, using temperature data of different types and from different sources, as
follows.
1. From 40 North American climate stations above latitude 45◦N [Canadian Cli-
mate Program, 1982, 1984], arranged in 5◦ zonal bands, we determined the variation
with latitude of the zonally averaged mean daily maximum temperature, 〈T0m〉, at the
surface during the growing season. (We use the mean daily maximum, rather than the
mean daylight-hour temperature, due to its ready availability.) These data are plotted
as the circles in Figure 3.17.
2. At intermediate latitudes, we supplement the Canadian data with values of the
average station maximum July surface temperature at scattered U.S. locations, as
given by the U.S. National Weather Service [1974; see Eagleson, 2002, Figure 10.6]
and plotted in Figure 3.17 as the triangular points. Note that these data mesh smoothly
with the Canadian data.
Note by the dashed straight lines between 45◦N and 65◦N, which approximate
the observed temperature distribution in Figure 3.17, that the temperature is nearly
constant at 〈T0m〉 = 14◦C between latitudes 52◦N and 60◦N, which coincide with the
approximate bounds to the boreal forest given by the maps of Bailey [1997], and that
the distribution changes quite abruptly from and to falling temperatures outside these
limits. Rosswall and Heal [1975] state that the warmest annual temperature at 15
sites in the tundra biome is 14◦C. Thus, with 15◦C apparently the lowest optimum
temperature for a C3 plant (Arctic pine) [Larcher, 1983, Figure 3.35], we select the
beginning of the boreal forest at 52◦N as the latitude at which temperature replaces
light in determining the local species of C3 plants and 60◦N as the latitude at which
decreasing temperature forces suboptimal productivity from these limiting Arctic
plants.
We have assumed that I0 ceases to control βLt for � ≥ 52◦N (i.e., ∂βLt/∂ I0 = 0
there), and we have seen in Figure 3.17 that T0(�) ∼= constant between 52◦N and
60◦N (i.e., dT0/d� = 0 there). Thus, from equation (3.43),
dβLt
d�= 0, 52◦N ≤ � ≤ 60◦N. (3.45)
The absence of need for the bioclimatic detail of equation (3.2) to achieve our
present goals suggests that the extension of this simple Taylor expansion technique
to other latitudes may require only substitution of one climatic forcing for another or
the addition of a second (or even third) forcing variable in a multivariable expansion.
Perhaps in the lower latitudes, bioclimatic control shifts to water. It seems important
as a next step to examine, in the same manner, the predictive ability of variations in
both seasonal precipitation and surface temperature.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-03 AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 22:7
68 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
Extension of these range forecasts by use of multipleforcing variables
Although we do not attempt here an expansion of our formulation to incorporate
one or more additional forcing variables, we note that this can be done without a
great deal of added complexity. Benjamin and Cornell [1970] point out that if the
species-climate relationship, s(c), is multivariate (rather than univariate, as assumed
here), that is, if
s = f (c1, c2, . . . , cn) , (3.46)
then for uncorrelated climate influences, ci , the first-order species variance is
σ 2s ≈
n∑
i=1
(
∂ f
∂ci
∣∣∣∣ci
)2
σ 2ci. (3.47)
We leave the pursuit of this higher-order approximation for others to explore.
A look ahead
As the variance of light increases northward, there is, under the univariate and one-
to-one forcing assumed herein, an increase in the variance of local species in this
direction. However, we cannot draw conclusions from this behavior alone concerning
the observed number (i.e., richness) of species at each latitude. Although it might
seem that richness should rise with the variance of light, we must remember that
to be counted, the species identifier (βLt in this work) must be a discrete, rather
than a continuous, variable. We approach this problem in chapter 4 by defining and
counting the discrete, cloud-forced, intraseasonal light (and hence heat) “pulses” that
we observe serve both as potential germinators of existing seeds of separate species
and as support for emergent plants on an assumed one-to-one basis.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
C H A P T E R 4
Richness of Local Species:Prediction Versus Observation
Germination is the process of greatest importance for distribution ecology.Larcher [1983, p. 31]
Introduction
Wallace [1878] was probably the first to report a latitudinal gradient in observed local
richness of plant species (i.e., the number of species in a “community”), which he
noted to decrease by 3 orders of magnitude from tropics to tundra. (Stevens [1989]
reported similar gradients for other taxa.) Other similar observations have followed,
as detailed in chapter 1. Many investigators have postulated the cause of this rich-
ness gradient to be gradients in plant resources such as precipitation, soils, and light,
as summarized by Huston [1994]. Among them, Fischer [1960] suspected gradi-
ents in environmental factors such as temperature and humidity, whereas Currie and
Paquin [1987] as well as Scheiner and Rey-Benayas [1994] pointed to variations
in the biologically usable available energy. However, a theoretical expression con-
necting local richness to ecosystem dynamics is needed to understand, manage, and
prevent loss of biodiversity due to climate change [Carpenter et al., 2006; Weir and
Schluter, 2007; Marshall, 2007; Schluter and Weir, 2007], and no such theory has
been found.
Having had such success here (chapter 3), associating the local statistical distri-
bution of species, and hence their latitudinal range, with the local variations of SW
flux, and noting (in chapter 1) Rapoport’s observation of related range and richness
gradients, we follow Wilson’s [1992] “climate variability” insight and seek to derive
the number (i.e., richness) of local species also in terms of the properties of the dis-
tribution of local SW flux. Before beginning this derivation, it is helpful to see where
69
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
70 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 4.1 Latitudinal envelopes of observed plant richness. Dashed curve: from Reid andMiller [1989], adapted by Huston [1994, Figure 2.1, p. 20]; further adaptation here with permis-sion of the World Resources Institute and Cambridge University Press. Solid curve: data of Gentry[1988, 1995] as presented by Enquist and Niklas [2001] and further adapted here by permissionfrom Macmillan Publishers Ltd: NATURE, vol. 410, p. 656, Fig. 1a, c© 2001.
we are going. Accordingly, two frequently referenced latitudinal gradients of plant
richness are shown in Figure 4.1.
The solid line depicts the maximum envelope of local richness observations for
all tree species in 0.1 ha (103 m2) communities of the Northern Hemisphere. This
envelope derives from a global set of 227 observations of tropical and temperate
closed-canopy forest communities on six continents, which was assembled by Gentry
[1988, 1995] and later presented by Enquist and Niklas [2001, Figure 1a]. The latter
presentation of these data is reproduced entirely as Figure 1.1b and as a maximum
envelope for the Northern Hemisphere as the solid line in Figure 4.1.
The dashed line in Figure 4.1 depicts the maximum envelope of local richness
of all vascular plant species (including trees) observed by Davis et al. [1986] in
globally distributed communities of varying size. These community species counts
were subsequently scaled allometrically, as we discuss later, to a common 106 ha
(1010 m2 or 10,000 km2) area and are presented in bar graph form on a global map
by Reid and Miller [1989, Figure 4], and later as a (scaled) count versus latitude by
Huston [1994, Figure 2.1]. (The property of obeying a power law is called “scaling”
because power laws are a source of self-similarity that reveals the generic properties
of a class of systems without understanding all the details of the underlying processes
[Rodrıguez-Iturbe and Rinaldo, 1997; West et al., 1997; Martın and Goldenfeld,
2006].) The envelope of the scaled data points are shown by the solid circle symbols
and connecting dashed line in Figure 4.1. The scaling process is described as follows.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
C H A P T E R 4 • R I C H N E S S O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 71
FIGURE 4.2 Latitudinal distribution of observed richness of vascular plants (continentalWestern Hemisphere). Adapted from Reid and Miller [1989] and Huston [1994] with permissionof the World Resources Institute and Cambridge University Press.
Lomolino [1989] credits Huxley as being first to recognize the so-called species-
area relationship, �s = cAz , scaling the number of separate local species, �s , ac-
cording to the local (“community”) area, A, in which the species are counted, and
with z and c being local constants [see Martın and Goldenfeld, 2006]. The value of z
for plants as found by Williamson [1988] is 0.2 < z < 0.4, whereas in earlier work,
Connor and McCoy [1979] found 0.15 < z < 0.35, in which the lower value best
represented the variability of continental areas and the higher value represented the
homogeneity of islands. It is easy to see that d�s/d A → 0 rapidly as A gets large and
thus that almost all the vascular species will be found in an area very much smaller
than the 106 ha chosen by Reid and Miller [1989] for “homogeneity scaling” of the
Davis et al. [1986] observations.
We restrict our theoretical analysis here to the limiting condition of maximum
species richness at each latitude. Therefore, to continue our (zeroth-order) comparison
of prediction with observation, we select from the literature those species counts
taken from the largest areas having homogeneous climate. In particular, we select
here the Davis et al. [1986] counts of vascular species scaled to 106 ha sampling areas
(presented in their entirety here as a continuous function in Figure 4.2) as representing
the maximum number of separate species that can be germinated and stably supported
(on average) by homogeneous climates at each latitude. This scaling ensures that the
areas sampled are comparable in size to that of the satellite pixel, 77,312 km2 (7.7 ×106 ha), at which the climate is resolved, enabling us to test our proposition that local
species counts are another biological manifestation of the local climatic variations
presented in chapter 2.
It is not clear from study of the open literature whether the Davis et al. [1986]
and Gentry [1988, 1995] databases are totally independent. However, assuming their
independence, we scale the Gentry data (solid curve in Figure 4.1) to 106 ha using
z = 0.25 at all latitudes, an average of the Connor and McCoy [1979] range. The
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
72 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
scaled values are plotted as plusses in Figure 4.1 and can be seen (for whatever
reason) to confirm the Davis data (dashed curve) almost exactly. We now proceed
using the “Davis curve” as the observational basis for evaluating our theory for the
maximum (i.e., “potential”) number of local species.
From continuous to discrete distribution of local species
Population richness is a recognized means of adapting to randomly fluctuating envi-
ronments [e.g., Huston, 1994; Kussell and Leibler, 2005], and we use this connection
here. We assume the species density within our large area to reflect variations in
the variety of separately favorable conditions for seed germination and shoot es-
tablishment experienced locally over the fundamental unit of vegetative time: the
growing season. These germination/establishment conditions are known to include,
among other things, (1) temperature, (2) moisture, (3) preceding period of dormancy,
(4) particular photoperiod, and (5) SW radiative flux.
Assuming the local species, s ≡ βLt (see Appendix B), to be continuously dis-
tributed, we have shown (chapter 3) its mean, s ≡ βLt , to be determined to the zeroth
order in a “neutral” model by the mean local canopy-top SW flux, I0, in the grow-
ing season (equation (3.2)), whereas the local species variance, σ 2s , is fixed by both
the local variance of seasonal SW flux, σ 2I0
, and the local gradient of mean species
with respect to mean seasonal SW flux, dβLt/d I0 (equation (3.6)). We must now
transform this continuously variable measure of local species into the discrete mea-
sure needed for counting the number of species defining local richness. In doing so,
the zeroth-order physical dependency of (continuously variable) species on SW flux,
demonstrated in the previous chapters, must also govern the discretely variable case.
Once again, the complexity of the issue demands approximation, and we extend our
zeroth-order, neutral-model approach of chapter 3 by selecting, as a proxy generator
of potentially enduring local species, the weak alternate land surface heating and
cooling caused by the local time variation in atmospheric interception of incoming
radiation by both transient clouds and the “clear” sky. We begin the development by
deconstructing the observed time series of local growing seasonal, canopy-top SW
flux into a sequence of irregularly sized and spaced, rectangular pulses of alternate
heating and cooling caused by the oscillating atmospheric transmittance due to clear
sky followed by cloud cover. These heating-cooling cycles are propagated to ground
level, where we consider them to be the local environmental “disturbances” that act
to germinate seeds (one of the three germination patterns recognized in the classic
work of Pickett and White [1985]) and to provide stressless initial shoot support
for the variety of local species. We assume that each pulse of canopy-top light
in a single growing season results in the germination and support of a separate
species due to unspecified differences in their photoperiod or in the initial heat and
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
C H A P T E R 4 • R I C H N E S S O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 73
moisture conditions in the soil when the pulse arrives. During the following local
growing season, the distribution of pulses and their initial conditions will be somewhat
different, germinating some species not present at the start of the season and failing
to support (by stressing) some species present at that time. We also assume that even
weak but repetitive short-term stress can limit the establishment of newly emerged
species. Finally, we assume that these gains and losses of species are equal in number
over time and therefore that we can estimate the local number of species as being
identical to the time average of the local number of light pulses received during the
local average growing season. However, because some local pulses are so small as to
germinate no species or are so similar as to germinate and support the same species,
we will refer to the “one-for-one” population, estimated as just described, as defining
the potential (i.e., maximum possible) number of local species, called herein max �s .
Local SW flux as a stationary Poisson stochastic process
To review briefly, the SW flux data presented in chapter 2 are based on satellite
observations defining canopy-top SW flux, i0 (Wtot m−2), spatially averaged at pixel
(referred to as “local”) scale every 3 hours [Pinker and Laszlo, 1992]. These i0 are
averaged in time over the local growing season for each of the k years of record to
get a time series of annual local averages, I0k (Wtot m−2), which are in turn averaged,
first over the k years to obtain I0, and then zonally at intervals of latitude to obtain
the estimates of zonal climatic mean,⟨
I0⟩
, and variance,⟨
σ 2I0
⟩
(W2tot m−4) reported in
Tables 3.3 and 3.4. Because we have no information about the longitudinal variation in
the richness observations of Davis et al. [1986], we omit the zonal averaging symbol,
〈. . .〉, in the remainder of this chapter and treat both the climate and the resulting
species richness as being zonally homogeneous.
It seems reasonable to assume that it is the larger local SW flux fluctuations,
I0 j > I0, that are responsible for germination and shoot emergence. However, we
have reasoned (see Figures 3.2 and 3.4) that for C3 species, only those supported by
the local annual fluctuations in SW flux satisfying I0 j ≤ I0 are unstressed on average,
and hence stable locally, and therefore survive to be counted in an observational study
of local richness. We begin our theoretical study of local richness by modeling the
instantaneous canopy-top SW flux, i0, at pixel scale during the growing season as
a stationary, Poisson-distributed arrival process of “rectangular pulse” disturbances
(see Figure 4.3), following the generalized method pioneered for “point” rainfall
by Todorovic [1968]. Simplifying the latter work for the stationary case, Eagleson
[1978] derived the first two moments of local annual rainfall, given the observed
properties, including frequency, of the constituent local storms. Here we have the
inverse problem: from the satellite observations (chapter 2), we have the seasonal
statistics of local canopy-top SW flux but not the number of these events due to
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
74 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 4.3 Idealized local time series of species-supporting cloud events.
the 3 hour gap between local revisitations by the satellite, and we seek to derive
the maximum annual number of (potentially) C3 species–supporting subseasonal
local SW flux events. These particular events will be identified by cloudiness, which
produces i0 ≤ I0, because these are associated with the seasonally stable and thus
countable species, βLt ≥ βLt , as we discussed in chapter 3 (Figures 3.2 and 3.4). If
i0 is not equal to or less than I0, it must be greater than I0, and thus the rectangular
pulses of our idealization alternate in time about the value I0, and there will be equal
numbers locally of the pulses, i0 > I0, and i0 ≤ I0. It is therefore immaterial to our
current purpose which class of pulses we choose to count.
Fundamental to this development is the formation of an idealized stationary time
series (see Figure 4.3) consisting of Poisson-distributed local arrivals [Benjamin and
Cornell, 1970] of pairs of alternating rectangular pulse cloud events. First of each
pair is a germination (i.e., warming) event, i0 > I0, of duration tb (hours), followed
immediately by a shoot-support event, i0 ≤ I0 (for C3 species stability, as shown in
Figure 3.2), of duration tc (hours). We seek to estimate the first two moments of υ,
the local number of complete-pair arrivals during a single growing season.
The C3 species–supporting cloud events, i0 ≤ I0, are taken to be independent and
identically distributed and are modeled by the shaded rectangular pulses in Figure 4.3.
We let the length of this time series be τ , the daylight-hour length of the local growing
season, because this is the basic unit of ecological time. The seasonal canopy-top
SW flux, I0 (not shown in Figure 4.3), represents i0 averaged over that time, τ ,
and is a variable from year to year at any given latitude. The SW flux, I�, at the
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
C H A P T E R 4 • R I C H N E S S O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 75
top of the atmosphere during daylight in the growing season is taken to be a separate,
time-averaged constant, I�, at each latitude, as given in Figure 2.7.
Distribution of C 3 species–supporting radiation interceptedin a growing season
The total shortwave radiant energy, R(ν), intercepted by a random number, ν, of C3
species–supporting cloud events, i0 ≤ I0 (shaded areas in Figure 4.3), each intercept-
ing the random amount of energy, h j , is written
R(ν) =ν∑
j=1
h j (Wtot h m−2), (4.1)
and its probability density function is fR(ν) (r ).
With ω being the seasonal rate of event arrivals, the probability, p|τ (ν), of
obtaining exactly ν arrivals of such cloud events, , in the local annual growing
season, t = τ , is, for small values of the ratio of mean event duration, mtc , to the
mean time between events, mtb , given [Cox and Lewis, 1966; Benjamin and Cornell,
1970] by the Poisson distribution
p|τ (ν) = (ωτ )ν e−ωτ
ν!, ν = 0, 1, 2, . . . , (4.2)
with the mean and variance of the number of arrivals, ν, given by
E [| τ ] ≡ mν = ωτ (4.3)
VAR [| τ ] ≡ σ 2ν = ωτ. (4.4)
We must note that for the radiational series being modeled here, the ratio mtc
/
mtb
will truly be small only in the more cloud-free (often arid) climates, and therefore
the Poisson model is not strictly valid elsewhere (such as in the moist tropics). Here
we assume it to be adequate everywhere at the level of approximation being used.
We note also that since p|τ (ν) < 1, it will take many seasons to thoroughly sample
the full local range of cloudiness, and consequently many seasons to develop the full
local range of stable C3 species.
The probability density of total local shortwave energy, R, available for stable
local speciation during the annual growing season, t = τ , is given by summing the
probability densities, fR(ν)(r ), for each of the mutually exclusive (i.e., different) and
collectively exhaustive (i.e., complete) number of cloud events, , that can together
intercept r species-supporting energy in this time, each weighted by the discrete
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
76 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE 4.4 Dimensionless gamma dis-tribution, G (κ, λh). Adapted from Benjaminand Cornell [1970, Figure 3.2.4].
probability, p|τ (ν), that exactly ν C3 species–supporting events will occur. This
gives the compound distribution
fR(τ )(r ) =∞∑
ν=1fR(ν) (r )p|τ (ν), r > 0
p|τ (0) = e−ωτ , r = 0
⎫
⎪⎬
⎪⎭
. (4.5)
To complete this derivation, we need the density function fR(ν)(r ), where R(ν) is
the sum of the random variables, h j , as given by equation (4.1). We assume the h j to be
independent and identically distributed random variables (having units Wtot h m−2),
for which we select the versatile (i.e., fits a variety of distributional shapes) and
analytically tractable gamma distribution [Benjamin and Cornell, 1970]
G (κ, λh) = (λh)κ−1 e−λh
(κ), (4.6)
and its form is illustrated graphically in Figure 4.4. In dimensional form, equa-
tion (4.6) is
fH (h) = λ (λh)κ−1 e−λh
(κ), (4.7)
where κ is the shape parameter (dimensionless) and λ is the scale parameter
(W−1tot h−1 m2). From equation (4.7), the mean energy intercepted by a single species-
supporting event is
mh = κ/λ (Wtot h m−2), (4.8)
and its variance is
σ 2h = κ/λ2
(
W2tot h2 m−4
)
. (4.9)
Or, defining
η ≡ m−1h , (4.10)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
C H A P T E R 4 • R I C H N E S S O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 77
we have
λ = ηκ. (4.11)
The gamma distribution is conveniently regenerative, meaning that the sum of ν
independent gamma-distributed variables having common λ and κ is also gamma
distributed, with
κν =ν∑
j=1
κ j = νκ (4.12)
λν = λ. (4.13)
Using the preceding, we can write the dimensionless density function for the total
shortwave energy, R(ν), intercepted by ν C3 species–supporting cloud events, as
G R(ν)(λr ) = (λr )νκ−1 e−λr
(νκ), (4.14)
or, in dimensional form, as
fR(ν)(r ) = λ(λr )νκ−1e−λr
(νκ). (4.15)
The mean of this distribution is
m R(ν) = νκ/λ (Wtot h m−2), (4.16)
and the variance is
σ 2R(ν) = νκ/λ2
(
W2tot h2 m−4
)
. (4.17)
Finally, substituting equations (4.2) and (4.15) into equation (4.5) and using equa-
tion (4.11), we get the compound distribution of cumulative intercepted, C3 species-
supporting, shortwave radiant energy over the growing season, t = τ :
fR(τ )(r ) =∞∑
ν=1
ηκ (ηκr )νκ−1 e−ηκr
(νκ)· (ωτ )ν e−ωτ
ν!, r > 0
pτ(0) = e−ωτ , r = 0
⎫
⎪⎪⎬
⎪⎪⎭
. (4.18)
Moments of C 3 species–supporting radiation interceptedin a growing season
With exactly ν C3 species–supporting cloud events in a growing season, equation
(4.1) gives
Rτ ≡ R(ν) =ν∑
j=1
h j (Wtot h m−2), (4.19)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
78 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
which, as has been pointed out earlier, is a random number of random numbers. We
now approximate the single-season canopy-top SW flux, I0, as
I0 = I� − Rτ
αcτ(Wtot m−2), (4.20)
in which I�, the seasonally averaged top-of-the-atmosphere “astronomical” SW flux,
varies with latitude only, as shown in Figure 2.7, from D. Entekhabi (personal commu-
nication, 2007), and αc is the fraction of the season experiencing i0 ≤ I0. We assume
both αc and τ also to vary primarily with latitude and not greatly from year to year.
Then, at any given latitude, αc∼= constant and τ ∼= mτ , and equation (4.20) yields
estimates of the first two moments of I0 to be
E[I0] ≡ I0 = I� − m Rτ
αcmτ
(Wtot m−2) (4.21)
VAR [I0] ≡ σ 2I0
= 1
α2c m2
τ
VAR [Rτ ] = σ 2Rτ
/
α2c m2
τ
(
W2tot m−4
)
. (4.22)
From equation (4.19) [see Benjamin and Cornell, 1970],
E[Rτ ] = mνmh (Wtot m−2) (4.23)
VAR[Rτ ] = E[
R2τ
] + E2[Rτ ](
W2tot m−4
)
, (4.24)
or
VAR [Rτ ] = mνσ2h + m2
hσ2ν
(
W2tot m−4
)
. (4.25)
Moments of the number of C 3 species–supporting cloud eventsin a growing season
Using equations (4.3), (4.4), (4.8), (4.9), and (4.11), equation (4.25) becomes
σ 2Rτ
= mν
κ
λ2+ κ2
λ2mν = m2
νm2h
[1
κmν
+ 1
mν
]
= m2Rτ
mν
[
1 + 1
κ
] (
W2tot m−4
)
,
(4.26)
or, rearranging for the immediate purposes,
mν = m2Rτ
σ 2Rτ
[
1 + 1
κ
]
, (4.27)
which represents the mean annual number of separate C3 species–supporting events in
a growing season. We use equations (4.21) and (4.22) to eliminate the dependence of
equation (4.27) on the fractional season length, αcmτ , obtaining, finally, at � = �◦,
mν =(
I� − I0)2
σ 2I0
[
1 + 1
κ
]
, (4.28)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
C H A P T E R 4 • R I C H N E S S O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 79
and using equations (4.3) and (4.4),
σν = m1/2ν , (4.29)
which, with equation (4.28), gives
σν =(
I� − I0)
σI0
[
1 + 1
κ
]1/2
. (4.30)
From climatic disturbance to C 3 species germination
Remember that our development of equations (4.28) and (4.30) has given us properties
of the local climate, in particular, the first two moments of the distribution of the
numbers of annual SW flux events supporting stable local C3 species. Each of these
support events is paired with a preceding unseasonably “warm” event, i0 > I0, which
(see Figure 3.2) is in a class of annual “disturbances” to the local regime of SW flux.
Considering the growing season to be the basic unit of local ecological time, we
now introduce the proposition that the local biological consequence of these local
seasonal disturbances is the germination and support of a specific set of C3 species.
Certainly, as we pointed out earlier, the full spectrum of potential species implied by
the magnitudes of mν and σν is not realized in a single growing season; many seasons
will be required, and some unconsidered local climatic (such as serial dependence
of pulses) or nutritional shortcoming may intervene at any time. We have assumed
the underlying time series to be stationary, and thus subsequent local seasons will
support the same number of C3 species (statistically speaking), which should be the
same species for the most part. We further assume that over a sufficient number of
seasons, local births (i.e., emergences or speciations) and deaths (or extinctions) will
be equal. We therefore suggest that with increasing time, t , the maximum possible
(i.e., the potential) number of local C3 species that can be realized, max �s , should
approach, but not exceed, the maximum number of local C3 species–enabling SW
flux disturbances, νmax, as given by the moments of the underlying distribution.
Furthermore, the larger νmax is, the larger is that fraction of the ν that is not sufficiently
different from its cohorts such as to germinate different C3 species. For this reason, we
expect the difference νmax − max �s to grow with increasing νmax. Using equations
(4.28) and (4.30), this is written
max �s —→t→∞ νmax = mν + niσν, (4.31)
which is valid at and above the scale of the vegetation community at which the
total number of species supported becomes independent of the supporting area. The
scaled observations of Davis et al. [1986; see Reid and Miller, 1989] are from areas
orders of magnitude larger than those for the data of Gentry [1988, 1995; see Enquist
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
80 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
TABLE 4.1 Estimation of the Gamma Function Shape Factor, κa
Latitudeb (deg) Location κ Reference
10 Kurmuk, Sudan 0.65 El-Hemry [1980]10 Gambela, Sudan 0.41 El-Hemry [1980]10 Chali, Sudan 0.18 El-Hemry [1980]10 Doro, Sudan 0.55 El-Hemry [1980]10 Tabus Bridge, Sudan 1.64 El-Hemry [1980]10 Daga Post, Sudan 0.46 El-Hemry [1980]25 Riyadh, Saudi Arabia 0.33 Eagleson [1981]26 Al Wajh, Saudi Arabia 0.73 Eagleson [1981]27 Qasim, Saudi Arabia 0.40 Caro and Eagleson [1981]26–49 75 first-order stations in continental 0.47 Hawk and Eagleson [1992]c
United Statesc
aOverall average, κ = 0.48.bApproximate.cReproduced by Eagleson [2002, Appendix F].
and Niklas, 2001], and thus the species counts of the former are more likely to be
unconstrained by the area sampled and will be the object of our attempt at prediction
of local C3 species richness.
Parameter estimation
In equation (4.31), ni defines the number of standard deviations above the mean at
which new C3 species can no longer be identified, and both ni and κ are required to
estimate νmax. Both parameters are difficult to specify for prediction purposes, and
we estimate each a priori by the following approximations.
Regarding κ , owing to the large pixel scale (77,312 km2) and the 3 hour pixel
revisitation time, we do not attempt to use the satellite radiation data to isolate series
of individual cloud events for estimation of the necessary values of κ . Instead, we
make use of previous estimates of κ from studies of 84 separate (point) rainstorm
series measured at ground stations in the continental Northern Hemisphere. Sampling
a range of latitudes and climates from arid to moist-tropical, these studies show re-
markable consistency of κ , as summarized in Table 4.1, and yield an average value
κ = 0.48. In Figure 4.5, we plot, as open circles and as a function of latitude, those
estimates of κ deemed most reliable, that is, the 75 estimated [Hawk and Eagleson,
1992] from first-order weather stations in the continental United States and having
an average value at these higher latitudes of κ = 0.47. The average value of these
estimates in each 5◦ zonal band is plotted in Figure 4.5 as a solid circle, from which
we see that these average κs vary latitudinally in a regular manner, which can add
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
C H A P T E R 4 • R I C H N E S S O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 81
FIGURE 4.5 Latitudinal variation of the gamma distribution shape factor, κ . Estimated [Hawkand Eagleson, 1992] from a series of local rainstorm arrivals from April to September in NorthAmerica, as observed at first-order weather stations by the U.S. Weather Service. Reproduced byEagleson [2002, Appendix F] c© Cambridge University Press. Reprinted with permission.
significantly to the latitudinal variability of the predicted species richness. Never-
theless, in the spirit of our zeroth-order effort, we ignore this variation and use the
average value, κ = 0.48, at all latitudes when evaluating equations (4.28) and (4.30)
in Table 4.2 for later comparison with the Northern Hemisphere observations of Davis
et al. [1986], shown in Figure 4.2. It would be wise to confirm the representativeness
of this rainstorm proxy through generation of a true climatology of local short-term
surface variations in SW flux.
Regarding ni , this multiple of the standard deviation of the number of SW flux
disturbance pairs defines the desired degree of completeness of the probability mass
function and is awkward to compute for the underlying Poisson distribution (equation
(4.2)). Although for small values of the shape parameter, ωτ ≡ mν (equation (4.3)),
say, mν = 5, the Poisson probability mass function is skewed and estimation of ni is
tedious, for larger values, say, greater than mν = 35, the Poisson distribution is closely
normal (see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Poisson distribution), and estimation of ni
is simple using the normal probability mass function presented earlier in Figure 3.6.
Applying equation (4.28) to our Western Hemisphere data (see Table 4.3, column 5)
yields 562 ≤ mν ≤ 5425, justifying our use of the normal approximation, ni = 2.5 at
99% probability mass for the single-sided distribution, i0 ≤ I0. We note in columns
5 and 7 of Table 4.2 that using this approximation, the niσν contribution to νmax is
equal to or less than 10% at all latitudes, and therefore fidelity in estimating ni is
unimportant at the accuracy level pursued herein.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
82 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
TABLE 4.2 Maximum Richness of Local Species in the ContinentalNorthern Hemispherea
� I b� 〈 I 0〉c 〈σ I 0 〉c
(deg. latitude) (Wtot m−2) (Wtot m−2) (Wtot m−2) mνd,e σν
d, f ni σνg max�s
d,h
0 825 440 9.2 5425 74 185 56105 840 450 8.6 6370 80 200 6570
10 848 475 8.0 6734 82 205 693915 849 494 8.7 5158 72 180 533820 844 494 9.2 4483 67 168 465125 832 484 12.0 2605 51 128 273330 814 481 12.6 2164 47 118 228235 789 469 13.9 1642 41 103 174540 758 439 12.9 1894 44 110 200445 721 404 12.6 1961 44 110 196150 677 362 14.4 1482 39 98 158055 628 335 17.5 868 29 73 94160 572 315 16.4 761 28 70 83165 506 269 17.6 562 24 60 622
aFor predictive comparison with Reid andMiller [1989] data in Figure 4.6.bApril–September Season. Figure 2.7.cTable 2.3.dAt κ = 0.48 (Table 4.1).eEquation (4.28). Mean annual number of local SW flux “pairs” (Figure 4.3).f Equation (4.30). Standard deviation of annual number of local SW flux “pairs” (Figure 4.3).gOr 2.5 × σν . Approximate maximum variation frommean species (ni = 2.5; Figure 3.6 at 99%).hEquation (4.31), columns 5 + 7. Maximum number of local species.
Predicted potential richness versus observed richness
Figure 4.6 shows the results of the comparison of equation (4.31), in which we let
max �s = mν + niσν, (4.32)
with the observations of Davis et al. [1986], as scaled by Reid and Miller [1989]. In
this figure, the local counts of the number of observed separate species of all vascular
plants, as scaled to their maximum allometrically, are plotted as the solid circles at
the latitudes of observation from the equator to 57.5◦ and are connected by a dashed
line, whereas the theoretical maximum number of C3 species, max �s , as given by
equation (4.32) and Table 4.2, is plotted as plus signs connected by a solid line over the
same latitudinal range. Figure 4.6 illustrates how well equation (4.32) represents the
observed local species counts for (1) � ≥ 22◦, where the agreement of theory and ob-
servation defies credulity, as did that for range, over essentially the same latitudes, as
was seen in Figure 3.10 (not only are theory and observation very close, but also, even
the slight “waves” in observed species numbers, the basis for which is visible in the
raw climate data of Figure 3.7, seem to be captured by the theory), and (2) � < 22◦,
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
C H A P T E R 4 • R I C H N E S S O F L O C A L S P E C I E S 83
FIGURE 4.6 Latitudinal variation of local species richness in the continental Western Hemi-sphere: prediction versus observation for vascular plants. Observations (black dots) of Reid andMiller [1989] as presented by Huston [1994] and adapted here with permission of Cambridge Uni-versity Press.
where, with one exception (� = 5◦), the theory provides a reasonable upper envelope
of the observations. The cause of the oscillating variability of the observed species
numbers at the lower latitudes is unclear, although pronounced oscillations in the
climate variables there are apparent in Figure 3.12. Considering our similar difficulty
with range prediction in the lower latitudes (Figure 3.13), other climate and/or soil
variables and/or unconsidered mechanisms may be exerting their effects. For example,
the anomalously large richness observed at � = 5◦ may be evidence of what Stevens
[1989, p. 253] hypothesized as a “constant input of accidentals” in the tropics, meaning
species continuously dispersed southward from the temperate zone and, while ger-
minated, sprouted and counted in tropical latitudes are not individually stable in the
long term due to the radically reduced intensity and scale of the climate disturbances
there when compared to conditions at the latitude of their modality. Huston [1994]
has recognized this hypothesis of Stevens [1989] as that termed earlier as the “rescue
effect” by Brown and Kodric-Brown [1977] and the “mass effect” by Wilson [1965].
Or, as seems more likely C3 species dominate in the relatively low incident light of
the extratropics, and under the reduced light of the tropical rainforests, they remain
prominent. However, C4 species dominate the tropical grasslands, and within the
tropical rainforests, the vertical variation in microclimate (i.e., light, moisture, and
even plant nutrients due to the tree-clinging body waste of climbing and flying animal
life) establishes a small but effective third spatial dimension to the plant habitat, which
supports extraordinary numbers of the CAM species of epiphytes such as bromeliads
and orchids. Furthermore, the relatively constant local soil temperatures over the year
make their fluctuations a questionable basis for selective plant germination at tropical
latitudes. Thus it is not surprising that the observations of all vascular plants (C3, C4,
and CAM) at about 5◦N latitude in the Western Hemisphere (Figure 4.6) exceed our
predicted numbers of C3 species there by about 40%.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-04 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:45
84 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
Hubbell et al. [2008], fitting Neutral Theory (which does not posit a specific bio-
climatic forcing, see glossary) to observed abundances of Amazonian tree genera
(without the C3 restriction), and using the commonality of metacommunity dynamics
for species and genera inherent in Neutral Theory, have expanded the genera obser-
vations to species level to predict (for example) a total tree species count (without
the C3 restriction) of 11,210 for the Brazilian Amazon basin, which has an average
latitude of about 5◦S. This estimate is almost twice that of the 6000 C3 species we
predict at 5◦N but is in line with the observations at that latitude for all vascular plants
[Davis et al., 1986] shown in Figure 4.2. We should note that absent an explicit tie to
climate, the Neutral Theory estimate of local species numbers cannot be adjusted a
priori to account for future climate change, as can the neutral theory presented herein.
However, to the extent that κ is dependent on climate over the range of climate
being studied, our neutral theory may lose some of this latter advantage over Hubbell’s
[2001; Hubbell et al., 2008] Neutral Theory. For example, “intertropical convergence”
of surface winds at low latitudes leads to the dominance there of small-scale vertical
transport of moisture and heat through moist convection, which peaks at about 10◦N
and 10◦S. The smaller space and timescales of the resulting moist-convective cloud
there cause the local shape parameter, κ , in the gamma distribution of light interception
events (Figure 4.4) to be smallest at or near these latitudes. Indeed, the decreasing
trend of κ equatorward is indicated clearly in Figure 4.5 by the plotted 2◦ zonal
averages (dark circles) of observations within the United States. Incorporation of
this higher-order scale effect will likely improve the C3 richness predictions at low
latitudes but will not be undertaken in this work.
The theoretical tie between range and richness
Stevens [1989] notes there to be an unspecified “ecological connection” producing an
inverse relation between the geographical range of species and the species richness at
common latitude. Repeated here, equation (3.22) leads to our theoretical forecast of
the range of the mean local species at � = �◦ as
Rs|�0 (�) = nsσs|�−(�) ≈ nI σs|�−(�) = 3.6
⟨
σI0
∣∣∣∣∣
d I0
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⟩
�◦−R�◦
. (4.33)
The species richness at � = �◦ − R�◦ = �−, as approximated by equation (4.28),
also contains the forcing σI0 . Eliminating this factor between equations (4.28) and
(4.33), we obtain
Rs|�◦(�) = 3.6[
1 + 1
κ
]1/2⟨[
I� − I0
ν1/2max
] ∣∣∣∣∣
d I0
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⟩
�◦−R�◦
, (4.34)
thereby providing an inverse theoretical relation between range and richness, as re-
ported observationally by Stevens [1989].
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-05 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:48
P A R T I I I
RECAPITULATION
Reductionism
Reductionism . . . is the search strategy employed to find points of entry into other-wise impenetrably complex systems. . . . [It] is the primary and essential activityof science.
Wilson [1999, p. 59]
85
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-05 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:48
C H A P T E R 5
Summary and Conclusions
Precis
Summary In this work, we have attempted to explain analytically, to “zeroth order”
and in terms of Darwinian interactions of biology and climate, the long-observed,
opposing latitudinal gradients of the range and richness of vascular land plants,
which constitute about 98% of all Earth’s land plant species (see the frontispiece).
Our theoretical model for both range and richness is based on the asymptotic form
of the photosynthetic capacity curve unique to the leaves of C3 plants (Figure 3.2b),
which category embraces the bulk of all vascular land plants (93%, as estimated
in the frontispiece). The intersection of the asymptotes of such saturating carbon
assimilation functions defines, for leaves of each C3 species, the intensity of light that
simultaneously maximizes CO2 assimilation efficiency and minimizes plant stress
(i.e., “instability”) for that species (see Appendix A). We take these intersections
to define the preferred, “Darwinian” operating points of C3 species, which together
constitute a one-to-one relationship between the “climate,” c (i.e., that optimal incident
SW flux), and a common measure, s, of specific species “biology.” Expanded to canopy
scale (see Appendix B), s is shown to be the canopy’s horizontal leaf area index, and
the functional relationship s = g(c) is called herein the “bioclimatic function.” We
show that neither the form nor the sense of this function plays a role in either range
or richness at our level of approximation.
Conclusion Using surface observations at leaf and canopy scales (Appendixes
A–C), with c being the local growing season average SW flux at canopy top, I0
(i.e., the “light”), and the C3 species measure s being the resulting local unstressed
horizontal leaf area index, βLt (i.e., the “species”) [Eagleson, 2002, Appendix H],
87
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-05 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:48
88 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
we find the bioclimatic function s = g(c) to have the alternative zeroth-order forms
Ec =SW flux
︷ ︸︸ ︷
I0[
1 − e−βLt] ∼= ε−1
i
CO2 fluxfrom plant biology
︷ ︸︸ ︷[
ca
R�cmin
/
βLt
]
Single-species canopy Single-species canopy
EcI = 0.61MJparm−2p h−1 EcC = 0.62MJparm−2
p h−1.
(5.1)
Using the average value εi = 0.81gs MJ−1tot for the potential assimilation efficiency
of intercepted light, as obtained from observations reported in the literature (see
Figure A5), we show in Appendix C that the function Ec represents an equality of the
maximum carbon supply to, and the maximum carbon demand by, the C3 plant when in
a state we call “evolutionary equilibrium.” Using data from the literature, Ec is shown
there to have, at these scales, the nearly constant average value Ec = 172 Wtot m−2,
which completes the zeroth-order bioclimatic function, s = g(c), as
βLt = �n
[
1
1 − 172/
I0
]
, I0 > 172 Wtot m−2, (5.2)
showing that βLt ↑ as I0 ↓ (Figure 3.2).
This bioclimatic function (equation (5.2)) demonstrates, at zeroth order, a one-to-
one relationship between values of local incident SW flux and maximally productive
local C3 species, thereby enabling transformation of a probability density function
(pdf ) of observed local SW flux into an estimate of the pdf of resulting potential
local species. It is shown that those local C3 species having βLt smaller than the local
average, βLt , will be stressed on the average; hence they are unstable in the long
term in that location and are assumed to be missing from the pdf of species existing
there. Similar reasoning shows local C3 species larger than the local average to be
unstressed on average, and thus they are assumed to be stable and present locally
but underproductive there compared with other locally present species (Figures 3.2
and 3.4).
At most latitudes, the pdf of the local annual seasonal-average SW flux, I0, is
shown from observations to be approximately normal about its long-term mean,
I0, although with truncated extremes (Figures 3.7 and 3.12). Although the local
coefficient of variation of I0 is less than 10% (Tables 2.3 and 2.4), the suggested
form of the bioclimatic function (equation (5.2)) is sufficiently nonlinear that the
corresponding coefficient of variation of βLt is high. Nevertheless, the analytical
benefits of linearity are so great, and the true form of the bioclimatic function is
sufficiently uncertain, that we extended our zeroth-order approach to include the
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-05 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:48
C H A P T E R 5 • S U M M A R Y A N D C O N C L U S I O N S 89
assumption of a “sufficient” degree of local linearity of this function. Major analytical
benefits of this linear approximation include the following: (1) the pdf of local C3
species measure, s, will also be approximately normal about the local average, s,
everywhere with corresponding truncation of the extremes; (2) the local mean values, c
and s, also satisfy the bioclimatic function; and (3) the bioclimatic function, s = g(c),
can be expanded in a useful Taylor series about the local mean.
Mathematical approximations in range calculation
Summary Wherever I0 has a one-to-one relationship with �, the bioclimatic
function of the means can be written βLt = g( I0) = h(�), as is the case for North
America and as is shown in Figure 3.5, along with two sketched distributions of species
about their local mean. Figure 3.5 demonstrates how the modal species at latitude �0
is also found in the (positive) tail of the (one-sided) distributions of stable C3 species
over a continuous span of lesser latitudes, ��−, which defines the range of the modal
C3 species at �0. With the distribution of local I0 being approximated as normal about
the long-term local mean, I0, and the bioclimatic function being locally linear, the
local number of C3 species standard deviations at truncation, ns , equals the observed
number, nI , of I0 standard deviations at truncation for the same probability mass
(Figures 3.7 and 3.12). Except for special cases, estimation of the range nsσs(�)
is then reduced to estimating the C3 species standard deviation in latitude units,
σs(�).
Conclusion The C3 species standard deviation, σs(s), is given (chapter 1) through
a Taylor series expansion of the bioclimatic function about its mean to be σs(s) ∼=σc|ds/dc|. Wherever s is a single-valued and locally linear function of �, this standard
deviation can be rewritten in the desired units of latitude (see chapter 3) as
σs(�) ≈ σc
|dc/d�| . (5.3)
Combining σs(�) with the latitudinal gradient, ds/d�, of the local average species,
we are able to estimate the range of the local modal C3 species, as shown in equation
(3.8) and Figure 3.5.
The predicted range of off-mode species at �0 may be found similarly and averaged
for exact comparison with the reporting of Brockman’s [1968] observations, presented
in Figure 1.1a. However, with small variance of the local I0, we assume small local
variance of βLt and hence compare the theoretical range of the local mode directly
with Brockman’s [1968] observed mean of the local ranges.
Considering the “equinoctial average growing season,” as shown in Figure 3.10,
the denominator of equation (5.3) vanishes over the tropical latitudes, whereas its
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-05 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:48
90 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
numerator (Figure 3.13) appears oscillating, indicating a very large variance of the
continuous variable defining C3 species. It seems reasonable to conclude that this
implies a very large number of discrete C3 species in the tropics, as we find in
chapter 4.
Evaluation of range prediction
Summary For North America, where I0↓ as �↑, the range, R (in units of latitude),
of the modal species, s, at latitude �0 depends on the number, ns ≈ nI , of standard
deviations (in units of latitude) of the species distribution, σs|�−(�), at lower latitude
�−, as given by Figure 3.5, in the form
Rs|�◦(�) = nsσs|�−(�) ∼= nI ·⎡
⎣σI0
∣∣∣∣∣
d I0
d�
∣∣∣∣∣
−1⎤
⎦
∣∣∣∣∣∣�−
. (5.4)
Calculation of R from equation (5.4) at a given �0 is a trial solution, but by choosing
�−, the solution for R is direct.
Conclusion We have used satellite remotely sensed SW flux observations pub-
lished by NASA and reduced for this work by D. Entekhabi (personal communica-
tion, 2007) to evaluate equation (5.4) on a point-by-point (i.e., �− by �−) basis for
North America (Table 3.3). We find (Figure 3.9) that for 46◦ < � = �0 < 63◦, equa-
tion (5.4) reproduces the Brockman [1968] observations with high accuracy in North
America when using a meridional average of nI ; however, below � = 46◦N, equation
(5.4) increasingly overpredicts the range. Perhaps this is due to the estimation error,
�R, introduced by our (increasingly poor) linearization of the bioclimatic function at
these lower latitudes, and to our continued assumption there that ns = nI . Examining
our evaluations of the three SW flux factors of equation (5.4), as plotted versus �
(Figure 3.8), we note oscillations about a linear trend in each. To eliminate any effect
of these oscillations on our range estimates, and noting the closely linear variation
of the observed ranges with latitude, we instead calculate the latitudinal gradient,
d R/d�, of equation (5.4) using the necessary gradients of each factor as determined
from the data by linear least squares fitting. The resulting estimate of d R/d� is almost
exactly that of the Brockman [1968] observations at and above � = 35◦. To compare
R versus �, however, requires locating the gradient in R, � space. We accomplish
this through a thought experiment that imagines an atmosphere as dry globally as the
actual atmosphere is only above 40◦N and 40◦S latitude. The experiment assumes
that at autumnal equinox, the imaginary atmosphere will have the same d I0/d� at
all latitudes, as the real atmosphere has above 40◦. This real gradient of I0 projects
in both hemispheres to a common maximum, I0, at the equator (Figure 3.10) for our
imaginary world, which signifies that the range will be zero at � = 0 (Figure 3.16b).
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-05 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:48
C H A P T E R 5 • S U M M A R Y A N D C O N C L U S I O N S 91
FIGURE 5.1 Range and richness of vascular land plants on the continents. Range: Theory isfor C 3 vascular land plants in North America; observations are for all trees (open circles) in NorthAmerica [Brockman, 1968]. Richness: Theory is for C 3 vascular land plants in the Northern Hemi-sphere; observations are for all vascular land plants (solid circles) in the Western Hemisphere, aspresented by Huston [1994, Figure 2.1] based on Reid and Miller [1989], reprinted with permissionof Cambridge University Press, and of the World Resources Institute; and for all trees (pluses) in theNorthern Hemisphere [Gentry, 1988, 1995], as scaled in Figure 4.1.
The real-world gradient of R above 40◦ must then project to the 0,0 origin of R versus
�, which the observations verify (Figure 3.11).
It is interesting to note that the point-by-point estimates of ranges for the entire
Northern Hemisphere show no relationship (Figure 3.14) to the North American
observations of Brockman [1968], probably due to the quite prominent oscillations in
σI0 (Figure 3.13). However, the (dimensionless) range gradient, E , calculated using
Northern Hemisphere climate data (Figure 3.13), demonstrates virtually the identical
magnitude (E = 0.104) to that found for North America (E = 0.105). We interpret
this to indicate the same extent of southward latitudinal dispersion of C3 species
on the separate continents of the Northern Hemisphere (at least), and we suggest Eas a possible new dimensionless ecodynamic similarity parameter characterizing a
southward latitudinal dispersion process for vascular land plants.
We have satisfied our goal of explaining theoretically, for latitudes above 29◦N,
the observed rise with latitude of the median range of the local vascular land plant
species using a “neutral theory,” in which that range is dependent on the local temporal
and spatial variability of light, irrespective of species. The comparison of theory and
observation is shown again here in Figure 5.1. Had we used local temperature, rather
than SW flux, as the independent driver of species range in a model similar to that
used here, the constancy of surface temperature observed (Figure 3.17) over 8◦ of
latitude centered at 56◦N would have been reflected in the predicted range at this
latitude. The absence of such an anomaly in observed range lends further weight
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-05 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:48
92 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
to our conclusion that SW flux is the principal determinant of range, at least above
35◦N.
Evaluation of richness prediction
Summary Having noted from the literature [e.g., Rapoport, 1975] observations
of an inverse relationship between the latitudinal gradients of range and richness, and
having found herein that variability of light controls the local statistical distribution
of C3 species, and hence their range (at least above tropical latitudes), it seems
logical that variability of light controls the local number of C3 species as well at
those latitudes. Biology enters once again at this point through species-selective seed
germination (along with subsequent stressless support of the emerging plant) by intra-
annual fluctuations in light. The importance of the germination mechanism has been
pointed out by many investigators, but the words of Larcher [1983] are particularly
relevant here: he notes that a temperature alteration between day and night promotes
germination and that germination is the process of greatest importance to distribution
ecology.
Once again, the formulation of the problem is statistical and is species-neutral in
the Hubbell [2001] sense. We simplify the time series of local, “instantaneous” SW
radiation, i0, into a time series of rectangular pulses, and we count the random number
of times, ϑ , in a single growing season that i0 falls below its long-term time-averaged
value, I0. (Note that in such a model, every “cold” pulse, i0 ≤ I0, is followed by
a “warm” pulse, i0 > I0.) We assume that each of the latter ϑ heat pulses will be
“bioclimatically different” in some way that is important to germination but is not
explicitly defined herein, such as by the heat and/or water content of the soil when
the pulse of heat arrives, and that therefore each pulse is responsible for germination
of a separate C3 species from seeds lying dormant in the soil. Subsequent years
will be more or less different, giving smaller or larger numbers, ϑ , and to the same
degree will germinate some new C3 species on their own, but will also (by virtue of
this difference) fail to support some existing C3 species germinated in prior years.
We assume a steady state system to be reached in the long term, over which the
emergences should balance the deaths and extinctions. Formulating this problem as a
statistical “arrival process” [see, e.g., Eagleson, 1978], we characterize the local C3
species distribution in terms of the first two moments of the seasonal pulse arrivals,
ϑ . We arbitrarily select that ϑ demarcating 99% probability mass as the maximum
possible (i.e., “potential”) number of local species, max s , as being the best measure
to compare with observations. The arbitrariness of this choice of ni affects max s
by less than 10% at all latitudes less than 60◦N (Table 4.2).
Conclusion We repeat here in Figure 5.1 the comparison of the potential number
of local C3 species as derived herein, with the actual numbers found present locally,
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-05 AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 16:48
C H A P T E R 5 • S U M M A R Y A N D C O N C L U S I O N S 93
both for vascular land plants in the Western Hemisphere [Davis et al., 1986], as
allometrically scaled to (essentially) areal independence at 10,000 km2 [Reid and
Miller, 1989], and for trees in the Northern Hemisphere [Gentry, 1988, 1995], as
scaled to 10,000 km2 in chapter 4. Our theory, as given in equations (4.28), (4.30),
and (4.31), can be seen to closely provide the expected envelope of observed species
numbers at all latitudes above about 20◦N.
For latitudes less than 20◦N, something different appears to be happening, perhaps
significant differences in the ecological strategies of co-occurring species, as has
been suggested at these latitudes by Kraft et al. [2008]. The known tropical presence
of non-C3 plants (see the frontispiece), such as the epiphytes, and particularly the
bromeliads and orchids, having thousands of species each, is suggested here as one
probable difference between our theory and observation at these latitudes. Another
probable difference arises from the shrinking time and space scales of the parent
meteorological events as we move southward from cyclonic to convective latitudes.
The distribution of flux pulses will then approach a “spike,” raising the possibility
that the number of biologically generative pulses may approach twice that of equa-
tion(4.31).
We believe we have shown, quantitatively as well as qualitatively, that along with
species range, species richness is also driven by the local variability of light (in
this case, at least above about 20◦N latitude), and that this common causality is
the bioclimatic basis for Rapoport’s rule [Stevens, 1989]. In the process, we have
confirmed light to be the dominant bioclimatic agent at extratropical latitudes and
that C3 plants must dominate at these latitudes. In the tropics, both range and richness
seem likely to be determined by nonneutral ecological strategies. Forecasts of changes
in the global distribution of plant species due to climate change are enabled by these
findings and should focus on changes in the local variabilities of light.
Finis
Summary The photosynthetically based bioclimatic function (equation (3.2))
demonstrates, to zeroth order, that species are a single-valued function of light, al-
lowing for expression of local species variance (equation (3.8)) and hence both local
average range and richness and local maximum richness, solely in terms of the local
variabilities of light, at least over extratropical latitudes.
Conclusion The results demonstrate (Figure 5.1) that local light alone does pre-
dict range at extratropical latitudes. Local moisture, nutrients, heat, or other forcing
variables alone could not also predict these structures, unless their local and spatial
variabilities were the same as those of light (see equation (3.8)). However, in the
tropics, where light alone fails to predict, joint forcing by more than one variable (in
the manner of equation 3.43) should be attempted.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
P A R T I V
Appendices: Reductionist Darwinian Modelingof the Bioclimatic Function for C3 Plant Species
The Earth system
Life and its environment evolve together as a single system so that not only doesthe species that leaves the most progeny tend to inherit the environment, but alsothe environment that favors the most progeny is itself sustained. What then is themechanism of this geophysiological regulation?
Lovelock [1986, p. 393]
95
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
A P P E N D I X A
The Individual C3 Leaf†
Photosynthetic capacity of the C 3 leaf
For light-limited vegetation, the principal biophysical control of productivity at a
given temperature and ambient CO2 concentration is the relationship between the
intensity of intercepted radiation and the resulting rate of carbon dioxide assimilation
at the scale of the individual leaf. This relation is known as the leaf photosynthetic
capacity function and follows the classical hyperbolic Michaelis-Menten equation
applicable for enzymatic reactions [e.g., White et al., 1968]. A typical example of this
photosynthetic capacity function for a C3 leaf of given species is shown in Figure A1,
under conditions in which the leaf temperature and ambient CO2 concentration are
both fixed. It has the saturating form, that is, it approaches a photosynthetic maximum
with increasing light [Monteith, 1963; Horn, 1971; Gates, 1980],
Pt = P� + Pr = Ps I�I� + Is�
, (A1)
in which, for an isolated leaf,
Pt total rate of assimilation of CO2 (i.e., the photosynthetic capacity), measured dur-
ing daylight hours and therefore implicitly including all daylight-hour respiration,
in grams CO2 per square meter of projected leaf area per hour;
P� net rate of photosynthesis by the leaf, in grams CO2 per square meter of projected
leaf area per hour;
Ps light-saturated rate of photosynthesis, in grams CO2 per square meter of projected
leaf area per hour;
†Much of this material has appeared earlier [Eagleson, 2002], with somewhat different notation.
97
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
98 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE A1 Photosynthetic capacity function for the C3 leaf (fixed temperature and CO2 con-centration).
Pr rate of respiratory release of CO2 during the nighttime destruction of plant sub-
stance (i.e., “dark” respiration) to provide energy for cell metabolism, in grams
CO2 per square meter of projected leaf area per hour;
I� intercepted photosynthetically active “surface” irradiance per unit of horizontal
leaf area, in watts per square meter (Wpar m−2 ≈ 1/2Wtot m−2);
Is� species structural parameter that measures the effectiveness of an isolated leaf in
utilizing PAR [Horn, 1971], in Watts per square meter (Wpar m−2 ≈ 1/2Wtot m−2).
The biochemical structure of the leaf, and hence the three species parameters
Ps, Pr , and Is�, may have alternate values for the same species, depending on whether
their location is near the top (“sun” leaf ) or near the base (“shade” leaf ) of the crown
[Larcher, 1995]. At our level of approximation, we neglect this difference and assume
that all leaves are sun leaves and hence that the three parameters are single-valued for
each species.
Observations of many vegetation types presented by Larcher [1995] show that
the rate of nighttime respiration exceeds 10% of photosynthetic capacity only for
the leaves of those C3 plants having the lowest productivity, such as desert shrubs
and arctic trees, leading us, in the continuing spirit of zeroth-order approximation, to
neglect Pr and thereby reduce the number of parameters to two. We can now write
equation (A1), for leaves of all C3 plants, in the convenient and revealing approximate
form
Pt
Ps
∼= P�
Ps
∼= 1
1 + Is�I�
. (A2)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
A P P E N D I X A • T H E I N D I V I D U A L C3 L E A F 99
The power of this approximation, provided by the common saturating property of C3
plants, greatly simplifies work across species, and because the C3 pathway for CO2
assimilation dominates among vascular land plants (see the frontispiece), equation
(A2) becomes the basis for our zeroth-order bioclimatic function, as follows.
For a given C3 species, s, with fixed temperature, T�, and ambient CO2 concen-
tration, c∗a , both Ps and Is� are constant, and we see from equation (A2) that the
relationship between P� and I� for leaves is linear at low light intensities; that is, for
I� � Is�, equation (A2) gives
P�
I�∼= Ps
Is�= εi , (A3)
where we define, with respect to the light intercepted by C3 leaves,
εi = potential efficiency of C3 assimilation of CO2 by intercepted light.
Note that reflected light is charged against this efficiency, as is the daylight-hour
respiration, and thus it cannot be a “lossless” conversion.
At higher light intensities, the C3 photochemical reaction becomes progressively
light saturated, and the efficiency of intercepted light utilization falls off as the CO2
fixation rate approaches its ultimate diffusive limit, Ps , for the given leaf temperature,
T�, and ambient atmospheric CO2 concentration, c∗a . The influence of these two
external modulators, T� and c∗a , on the photosynthetic capacity of a single species will
be discussed after we first follow the physical process of carbon mass transfer from
the free atmosphere to the leaf chloroplasts.
Mass transfer from free atmosphere to chloroplasts
Consider the flux of CO2 from the free atmosphere above the tree to the site of
carbon fixation at the chloroplasts in the interior of a single nonrespiring C3 leaf,
as shown schematically by the resistance path in Figure A2. The flux traverses both
Earth’s atmospheric boundary layer and the imbedded lower-surface boundary layer
of the single leaf, and thence through the leaf stomata to the interior site of fixation
at the chloroplasts. Associated with each of these path segments are the separate flux
resistances (all usually in seconds per centimeter): ra , atmospheric boundary layer
resistance (function of wind speed); rc, canopy (i.e., interleaf ) resistance (species
parameter); r�a , leaf boundary layer resistance (function of wind speed and leaf size,
shape, and texture, and thus largely a species parameter);←→rso , stomatal opening
resistance (function of degree of opening and species); ri , intercellular stomatal
resistance (function of species but small in magnitude with respect to←→rso ); and rm ,
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
100 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE A2 CO2 flux resistance of leaf.
mesophyll resistance (function of species and leaf temperature), the first five of which
comprise the diffusive resistance (←→rd ):
←→rd = ra + r�a + rc + ←→
rso + ri = rbl + rc + ←→rs , (A4)
in which the first two diffusive resistances form the boundary layer resistance (rbl),
rbl = ra + r�a, (A5)
and the last two diffusive resistances form the variable stomatal resistance (←→rs ),
←→rs = ←→
rso + ri ≈ ←→rso . (A6)
The interleaf canopy resistance (rc) and the ambient atmospheric boundary layer
resistance (ra) will be omitted from the present analysis of leaf behavior (as indicated
by the bracket spanning them in Figure A2) because observations of leaf photosyn-
thetic capacity and flux resistance are made using the environment local to the leaf.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
A P P E N D I X A • T H E I N D I V I D U A L C3 L E A F 101
The diffusive and mesophyll resistances make up the species-dependent, single-leaf
variable resistance (←→R� ),
←→R� =←→
rd + rm = r�a + ←→rs + rm . (A7)
The flux-gradient relationship, Fick’s law, is written for this mass transfer [Legg
and Monteith, 1975] as
Qm = Kmdcm
dx, (A8)
in which Qm ≡ QCO2 is the mass flux density of CO2 in grams per meter squared per
second; Km ≡ KCO2 is the mass diffusivity of CO2 in meters squared per second (in
both of which the area in meters squared refers to an area perpendicular to the local
flux); cm ≡ c is the mass density of the diffusant, CO2, in grams per cubic meter; and
x is the position along the flux path in meters. In the general case, both the diffusivity
and the concentration gradient will be (separate) functions of x , but in a zeroth-order
approximation, we will lump each at its respective spatially constant “average” value,
KCO2 , and �c/�x . Such a linearization is commonly written in the form of Ohm’s
law [Thom, 1975], as we do here for the flux of CO2 from the free atmosphere to
the chloroplasts within a (nonrespiring) leaf. Consistent with the leaf-scale work of
Gates [1980], this becomes
QCO2 = c∗a − cc←→R�
, (A9)
where c∗a and cc are the concentrations of CO2 in the ambient atmosphere above
the isolated leaf and in the (leaf average) chloroplasts, respectively, in grams CO2
per cubic meter, and←→R� ≡ �x/KCO2 is the species-dependent, variable, single-
leaf resistance (s m−1) to diffusion over the path through the leaf boundary layer,
through the stomata, intercellular air spaces, cell walls, cytoplasm, and (finally) into
the chloroplasts of that leaf. Light-driven CO2 assimilation takes place within the
chloroplasts at a rate dependent upon the SW flux, I�, incident on the leaf (as well
as on both the ambient concentration, c∗a , and the leaf temperature, T�, as we will see
later).
In compatible units, QCO2 ≡ P�, and we can write equation (A9) as
P� = c∗a − cc←→R�
. (A10)
Refer now to Figure A3a and, in the manner of Gates [1980], consider the sequence
of events for a C3 leaf of given species starting in darkness with the stomates closed
and CO2 trapped in the intercellular spaces at a concentration equal to that (c∗a) in the
ambient atmosphere outside the leaf. We will follow the process of sunrise using the
asymptotes of this photosynthetic capacity diagram as an aid to easier understanding
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
102 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE A3 Structure of the C3 photosynthetic capacity function (for leaf of species s at con-stant c∗
a and T� , with no dark respiration).
of the changing mixture of controlling processes, and for simplicity of the present
argument, we will keep both the leaf temperature and the ambient CO2 concentration
constant.
The sun begins to rise, and as the light intensity (i.e., SW flux), I�, increases
(0 < I� � Is�), it excites the chloroplasts that first fix the trapped CO2. The chloro-
plast CO2 concentration drops quickly, followed by the intercellular CO2 concen-
tration, which, on reaching a critical low level, triggers a stomatal control circuit,
which opens the stomates just enough to admit CO2 at the rate called for by the low
assimilative capacity of this low light intensity and no further, (presumably) to limit
transpirative water loss. As the light intensity continues to increase, and with it the
rate of photochemical carbon assimilation, so do both the stomatal opening (reducing←→rso and hence
←→R� ) and the CO2 concentration in the chloroplasts, until, at I� = Is�,
the stomates are maximally open (as modulated by leaf temperature and ambient CO2
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
A P P E N D I X A • T H E I N D I V I D U A L C3 L E A F 103
concentration), offering their minimum resistance to flow. With open stomates, the
chloroplast CO2 concentration rises nearly to the ambient (leaf ) value, and the system
becomes “light saturated” in the sense that higher incident light intensity produces
no further increase in assimilation. At this point, the resistance to CO2 flow is at its
minimum, the flow rate of this species of leaf is at its maximum, and the photochem-
istry, the light-stimulated capacity of which has been setting the stomatal opening,
yields control of the flow rate to the diffusional resistance. Remember that the limiting
behaviors characterized artificially by the asymptotes of the photosynthetic capacity
curve (but conveniently for our zeroth-order work) indicate that this change of control
occurs abruptly, at the point of asymptote intersection, I� = Is�, whereas it actually
occurs gradually over the whole range of light-induced stomatal opening.
For I� � Is�, we have argued that cc � c∗a and that in response to the capacity of
the photochemical process, the stomates open only enough to admit CO2 at the rate
demanded by that low light. This small stomatal opening makes←→rso very large and
allows us to write, from equation (A10),
lim←→R� →∞
P� = c∗a
←→R�
, (A11)
and establishes
P� = c∗a
←→R�
,←→R� → ∞, (A12)
as the familiar rising (low I�) asymptote of the photosynthetic capacity, P�, when writ-
ten in terms of the independent variable←→R� . The latter will decrease with increasing
I�, until it reaches its minimum value, R�min , for the given species, whereupon I� = Is�,
and the rising asymptote takes its maximum value, P� ≡ Ps . This is illustrated graph-
ically in Figures A3a and A3b, where we indicate that for each species, s,
Ps (s) = c∗a
R�min (s). (A13)
Note from equation (A13) that an increase in ambient CO2 concentration leads to
proportionate increase in Ps for all C3 species.
In summary, at low I�, the CO2 flux is fundamentally controlled by the photo-
chemistry of assimilation, which, to the zeroth order, is a function of the particular
photosynthetic process (C3 in this case) and is not controlled by the leaf geometry.
Therefore the slope of the I� ≤ Is� asymptote represents the potential photochemical
efficiency, εi . It should be independent of the C3 species, except for the species de-
pendence of the reflection and respiration included within the measurements defining
εi . We demonstrate later that this is indeed the case for woody C3 plants using mea-
surements of εi taken from the published photosynthetic capacity curves of C3 trees
and shrubs.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
104 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
At the other extreme, with the stomates of species, s, already fully open, increasing
light intensity increases the photochemical demand for CO2 beyond that reached at
I� = Is�. With the leaf resistance fixed at its minimum value, R�min , the assimilation
rate for I� � Is� is limited by this diffusional resistance. Thus, for I� > Is�, the
asymptotic approximation for P� is again as given by equation (A13).
To the zeroth order, we can now quantify the departure, �P�, of the Michaelis-
Menten function from its photochemical (low I�) and diffusional (high I�) asymptotes,
as is shown in Figure A3c. For a given species,
�P� = c∗a
←→R�
− c∗a − cc←→R�
= cc←→R�
, I� < Is� (A14)
�P� = c∗a
R�min
− c∗a − cc
R�min
= cc
R�min
, I� ≥ Is�. (A15)
Assimilation modulation by leaf temperature and ambientCO2 concentration
The photochemical processes of carbon assimilation are sensitive to leaf temper-
ature, T�, in such a way that the difference between gross photosynthesis and
respiration yields a net photosynthesis, P�, which maximizes (Ps = Psm) at an
intermediate, species-dependent temperature, T� = Tm , thereby providing a heat-
based, productivity-maximizing species selection mechanism [see Larcher, 1983, Fig-
ure 3.35]. With T� = Tm , Psm varies linearly with the ambient CO2 concentration, c∗a ,
as given by equation (A12). We do not consider these modulations in this zeroth-order
work.
Exponential approximation to the C 3 photosynthetic capacity curve
For analytical convenience and because of the dominance of diffusion in CO2 flux,
we fit the Michaelis-Menten relation for the nonrespiring leaf (i.e., equation (A2))
at optimum temperature, Tm , with its more convenient exponential approximation
[Eagleson, 2002]
P�
Psm≡ Po = 1 − exp
(−I�/
Is�)
, (A16)
as shown in Figure A4a. Note that the rising low-light asymptote of equation (A16)
also has the slope
∣∣∣∣
d Po
d I�
∣∣∣∣
I�=0=
∣∣∣∣
1
Is�exp
(−I�/
Is�)∣∣∣∣
I�=0= 1
Is�, (A17)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
A P P E N D I X A • T H E I N D I V I D U A L C3 L E A F 105
FIGURE A4 Proposed local Darwinian selection of woody C3 species. Adapted from Eagleson[2002, Figure 1.1]. Copyright c© 2002 Cambridge University Press.
which intersects the horizontal asymptote, P� = Psm , at I� = Is�, maintaining the
slope, εi , of the rising asymptote of the optimum photosynthetic capacity curve at
εi ≡ Psm
Is�. (A18)
Potential assimilation efficiency of C 3 leaves
Eight paired values of Psm and Is� for individual C3 leaves of differing woody species
are given in Table A1, as taken by Eagleson [2002] from published observed photo-
synthetic capacity curves. The ambient CO2 concentration, c∗a , is assumed to have a
common value in all these observations. The paired values are plotted in Figure A5,
where we see that to the zeroth order, the value of the assimilation efficiency, εi , as
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
106 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
TABLE A1 Parameters of Some C 3 Speciesa
Fitted(1) Parametersb Calculated Parameters
I s� Psm Observed I s�βL t = Ec I εi = Psm/I s�
(MJtotm−2h−1) (gsm−2h−1) Parameter βL tc
(MJparm−2h−1) (gsMJ−1par)
Tropical
Goethalsia 0.44(2) 0.38(2) 2.61(2) 0.57 1.73
Temperate
Creosote bush 2.34(3) 2.08(3) 0.37(3) 0.43 1.78Red oak 0.46(4) 0.28(4) 2.60(5) 0.60 1.22White oak 0.46(4) 0.26(4) 2.60(5) 0.60 1.13Loblolly pine 0.60(4,6) 0.40(4,6) 2.58(5) 0.77 1.33
Boreal
Sitka spruce 0.52(7) 0.55(7) 3.15(8) 0.82 2.12European beach 0.32(9) 0.33(9) 3.19(5) 0.51 2.06Arctic willow 0.38(9) 0.30(9) 3.04(10,11) 0.59 1.58
Average 2.52 0.61 1.62aParenthetical superscript numbers refer to the source listing given subsequently. Columns 2–3 are from published
phytotron observations of individual leaves. Column 4 is from canopy observations by other observers at different
locations; for Sitka spruce, all values reported(12) are averaged. Observed mass of carbon dioxide assimilated (g)
is converted to equivalent solid biomass (gs ) using the accepted(13) conversion factor, υ = gs/g = 0.5. The solar
radiation spectrum is partitioned nominally(14) by MJpar = 0.5MJtot. Sources are as follows: (1) Eagleson [2002];
(2) Allen and Lemon [1976]; (3) Ehleringer [1985]; (4) Kramer andDecker [1944]; (5) Baker [1950]; (6) Kramer and Clark
[1947]; (7) Jarvis et al. [1976]; (8) Landsberg et al. [1973]; (9)Muller [1928], as given by Kramer and Kozlowski [1960,
Figure 3.11]; (10) Cannell et al. [1987]; (11) Lindroth [1993]; (12) Landsberg and Jarvis [1973]; (13) Penning de Vries
et al. [1974]; and (14) Ross [1975].bUsing equation (A16), as shown in Figure A4.cProjected leaf area index (β ≈ κ).
given by equation (A18), has a common value, εi , given by the average of these eight
observations to be, for intercepted total SW radiation,
εi = 1.62 gCO2MJ−1
tot = 1.62 gsMJ−1par = 0.81 gsMJ−1
tot , (A19)
in which grams of CO2 have been converted to grams of equivalent solid biomass
using the generally accepted conversion factor [Penning de Vries et al., 1974]
gs/gCO2= 0.5, and the radiation spectrum is partitioned nominally [Monteith, 1973;
Ross, 1975] by MJpar∼= 0.5MJtot. Note that εi has also been reported as constant for
plants of the same metabolic type by Monteith [1977] and Gosse et al. [1986]. Our
value, as given in equation (A19), is consistent with that (εi = 1.60 gsMJ−1par) found
for the leaves of trees by Linder [1985], slightly larger than that (εi = 1.54 gsMJ−1par)
estimated for forest biomes by Ruimy et al. [1994], but significantly smaller than that
(εi = 2.98 gsMJ−1par) reported for arable crops by Monteith [1977], all for intercepted
radiation. (From remotely sensed εi = 1.5 gsMJ−1par (absorbed) using absorptance co-
efficient [Birkebak and Birkebak, 1964] αT = 0.51.)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
A P P E N D I X A • T H E I N D I V I D U A L C3 L E A F 107
FIGURE A5 Potential assimilation efficiency of intercepted light for leaves of woody C3 plants(assumed is that T� = Tm, and c∗
a is identical for each plotted observation). Adapted from Eagleson[2002, Figure 8.10]. Copyright c© 2002 Cambridge University Press.
With εi constant at εi across all woody C3 species, and assuming species to be
“Darwinially” differentiated by their maximum productivity, Psm , Is� becomes the
single, independent parameter defining their potential photosynthetic behavior.
The state of stress
We are assuming herein that the relentless pressure of evolution is toward the state
in which the plant utilizes the local resources dependably available to it in such
a way as to maximize the probability of successful reproduction. We call this the
optimal operating state. Accordingly, when a leaf is at an operating state in which it
is performing suboptimally by reason of one or more inadequate resources (such as
light, heat, water, CO2, or nutrients), we say that organ is stressed. It follows that a
leaf with stomata in a state other than fully open is in a state of stress.
Darwinian operating state of the individual C 3 leaf
Using equation (A17) to fit observations [Ludlow and Jarvis, 1971] of the CO2 transfer
resistance of Sitka spruce needle stomata, Eagleson [2002, Figure 8.8] demonstrated
that the stomata become effectively fully open at I� = Is�. Thus, to the zeroth order,
the leaf of a given species, Is�, is stressed (as defined earlier) only until the SW flux
rises to I� = Is�, whereupon it is unstressed and remains unstressed as I� exceeds
Is�. Eventually, for I� � Is�, water becomes limiting and stress returns. This state of
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
108 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
minimum stress has Darwinian significance when we consider the practical problem
of species selection at a given location where the seasonal average SW flux at the
leaf is I�. Again, working only with the asymptotes of the photosynthetic capacity
curve, as in Figure A4a, we see that species Is� = I� is the maximally productive,
unstressed species. This is clear from Figure A4b, where, with the local average SW
flux having the particular value I� = I ∗� , species 2, with higher productive potential,
will be stressed (i.e., Is�2 > I ∗� ), unless Is�2 = Is�1. The Darwinian operating state of
the C3 leaf is therefore
Is� = I ∗� = I�. (A20)
Should I ∗� be Is�2, instead of Is�1, species 1 would be unstressed but unstable due
to the danger of its displacement by the more productive species 2. Equation (A20)
thus becomes the Darwinian species selection criterion.
In northern latitudes, the daylight ambient temperature, T0, may fall such that the
leaf temperature, T�, is less than that, Tm , at which productivity is maximum for the
given species, as we have seen. In such cases, the maximum productivity, and with it
the stressless insolation, Is�, falls as well. It can be assumed that such a circumstance
puts evolutionary pressure on that species to adapt or evolve so as to restore the
optimum condition. Thus, when it is found to occur as the average state, we must
assume it to be a currently limiting condition on the evolutionary timescale.
Using the previously proposed Darwinian selection criterion, Is� = I�, under which
the photochemical capacity of the leaf is tuned to the local average radiational forcing
of the climate, we may refer to the common asymptote, εi , alternatively as the climatic
assimilation potential of C3 leaves, an assumed constant for the C3 photochemical
process.
As a reminder of these conditions for Darwinian selection, we have labeled, in
Figures A3a and A3b, the loci of both maximum efficiency and minimum stress for
all C3 species as well as the maximum productivity for the particular species whose
performance is sketched. To zeroth-order approximation, these three conditions are
all met at the asymptote intersection, which becomes the optimum operating point,
o, given the species shown in Figure A3c. Alternatively, from the Darwinian species
selection perspective, given the local light, I� = Is�, the species sketched will be the
one selected.
The univariate bioclimatic function at leaf scale
We now have the ingredients for a univariate bioclimatic function at leaf scale, in
which the bioclimatic interaction is driven by the single variable, I�, the time-averaged
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
A P P E N D I X A • T H E I N D I V I D U A L C3 L E A F 109
SW radiation incident on that leaf. Because the individual leaf operates as a single
element of a whole plant, we need now to consider which leaf (or leaf layer) in the
crown we will address. As we will see in Appendix B, the time-averaged SW incident
radiation will fall with depth, ξ , down into the crown (as a function of the “projected
leaf area index,” βLt , an important species parameter) from a maximum of I0 at the
crown surface, ξ = 0, to a lesser value, I (ξ ), at a lower elevation. Consistent with
our zeroth-order approximations we will consider here only that leaf which intercepts
the crown-averaged (designated by the ‘hat’), time-averaged SW flux, ˆI �, and has the
optimum average temperature T� = Tm .
Equation (A20) has described the optimum photochemical operating state of the
leaf to be I� = Is� (s). Thus setting I� = Is� (s) selects, out of the whole set of species,
that single species which, at the given I�, is maximally productive and unstressed.
We express this maximum value of the (saturating) carbon demand, DC , of the leaf
as
max{
DC (s)| I�
} = εi Is� (s) . (A21)
The saturating carbon supply, SC , expressed as a function of species is, from
equation (A13),
SC (s, u0, ra) = c∗a [rc (s)]
∣∣u0,ra ,ca
R�min (s), (A22)
in which, from Figure A2, u0, ra, and rc (s) represent the carbon-flux resistances of
the atmosphere and canopy above the leaf.
As we will argue in Appendix B, the supply and demand have been (and are being)
individually maximized over evolutionary time through separate modifications of
species leaf and canopy structure, giving, at any time,
max{
DC (s)| I0
} ∼= max {SC (s, u0, ra)} , (A23)
or, using equations (A21) and (A22),
εi Is� (s)︸ ︷︷ ︸
Photochemicalcarbon demandby average leaf
∼= max
{
c∗a [rc (s)]
∣∣u0,ra ,ca
R�min (s)
}
︸ ︷︷ ︸
Diffusivecarbon supplyto average leaf
, (A24)
in which ca is the CO2 concentration in the free atmosphere above the canopy and
R�min includes only leaf-associated resistances. The species, s, appears directly in Is�
through the shape of the photosynthetic capacity curve; implicitly in c∗a through the
contingence of rc on canopy structure; and implicitly in the minimum leaf resistance,
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXA AGU001/Eagleson December 4, 2009 9:49
110 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
R�min , through the size, shape, and texture of the leaves, through the size and density
of their stomatal openings, and through the diffusive properties of their mesophyll.
We call equation (A24) the “univariate bioclimatic function” at leaf scale, but
it is of instructional use only because the right-hand side cannot yet be expressed
explicitly in terms of s. Equation (A24) is amplified to the more useful canopy scale
in Appendix B.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXB AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 17:10
A P P E N D I X B
The Homogenous C3 Canopy
Idealized geometry of the leaf layer
Imagine a tree growing from seed; the emergent shoot produces a single leaf, which
orients itself with respect to the local seasonal solar altitude to maximize its rate of
CO2 assimilation. Because absorption of intercepted photosynthetically active radi-
ation (PAR) is almost complete and virtually independent of incidence angle [Ross,
1981], interception maximization will essentially ensure assimilation maximization,
provided that the leaf angle produces such reflection of longwave energy as will keep
leaf temperature photosynthetically optimal. Idealized, this situation is illustrated on
the right-hand side of Figure B1 for a single opaque leaf of one-sided area, A�, and
angle (with the horizontal), θ�, subjected to direct (i.e., “beam” rather than diffuse)
radiation, R, producing the “full” shadow area, A(1)s (the parenthetical superscript
refers to the number of leaves being considered).
Our shoot may be genetically programmed to produce additional leaves in a “layer”
parallel to the ground. To maximize assimilation (per unit ground area) by the layer,
we now assume that the leaves should arrange themselves [Eagleson, 2002] such that
the upper leaf surfaces are fully illuminated and no photosynthetically active radiation
is “wasted” by passing directly through the layer without interception. Such a highly
idealized layer is illustrated for two adjacent opaque leaves by the whole of Fig-
ure B1, with specular (i.e., nondiffusive) reflection from either leaf surface. The angle
of radiational incidence is α (also with respect to the horizontal); A(2)s is each leaf’s
full-shadow area, Ap is the “projected” (on a horizontal plane) leaf area, and A∗s is the
optimal full-shadow area. We note from the path of the reflected beam in Figure B1
that the assumed conditions for maximum unit area interception and thus (assumed)
111
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXB AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 17:10
112 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE B1 Optically optimal leaf layer geometry. Adapted from Eagleson [2002, Figure 3.20].Copyright c© 2002 Cambridge University Press.
maximum assimilation are satisfied when the geometry of the leaf layer produces
β ≡ cos θ� ≡ Ap
A�
= A∗s
A�
. (B1)
When the leaves of this first layer have formed, continued CO2 assimilation leads
to stem elongation and initiation of a new, higher layer of leaves in a genetically
predetermined structure. These new leaves now receive the radiation that was formerly
incident on the first (now lower) layer. In our idealization of Figure B1, the now lower
layer receives incident radiation reduced in intensity by absorption and backscattering
in the upper layer but (with specular reflection) at the same angle of incidence. The
leaf angles of the lower layer would remain unchanged for optimal assimilation. In
reality, however, some radiation incident on the lower layer will have been transmitted
through translucent upper leaves and diffusively downscattered by them as well. The
lower layer must therefore adjust its leaf orientations for optimum interception of this
altered radiation field. This process proceeds with an expansion of existing layers
and the growth of additional layers over many seasons, which requires continual
environmental adaptation of leaf angles. The leaf angles are a primary factor in
additional radiational extinction through backscattering, and in reality, they vary with
depth into the crown. The growth process will continue adding new leaf area (unless
optimal leaf temperatures can no longer be maintained) until the insolation available
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXB AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 17:10
A P P E N D I X B • T H E H O M O G E N O U S C3 C A N O P Y 113
for the bottom leaf layer is just sufficient to satisfy the needs of respiration. (In reality,
of course, the leaves of the individual tree crown vary in structure and performance,
the primary example being the low-assimilation “shade” leaves at the bottom of the
crown as opposed to the high-assimilation “sun” leaves higher up. To the zeroth order
of this work, we omit such differences and consider the photochemistry of all leaves
to be identical.) The tree is then assumed to be assimilating CO2 at the maximum
possible local rate.
Darwinian heat proposition
We now make the Darwinian assumption that to maximize productivity of seed
and hence of reproductive potential, the local species time-and-canopy-average leaf
temperature, ˆT �, is equal to Tm for that species which is selected such that its Tm
equals the local ambient growing season time average surface climatic temperature,
To; that is, the proposition sets
To = ˆT � = Tm . (B2)
Larcher [1995] reports satisfaction of equation (B2) by natural selection, and Eagleson
[2002] verifies this proposition from observations of loblolly pine, American beech,
and Sitka spruce in their natural North American habitats.
Vertical flux of radiation in a closed canopy
Understanding the vertical decay of light is key to the photosynthetic behavior of
the whole crown. However, precise mathematical description of the extinction of
generalized radiation with depth into such a structurally heterogeneous crown is a
daunting task, which is avoided through use of the approximate expedient introduced
by Monsi and Saeki [1953]. Their zeroth-order approximation, which is in the spirit of
this work, treats the mature crown as having a linearly varying extinction coefficient,
as described in this section.
We first follow the development of Monteith [1973] and consider the intercepted
portion, dI, of the vertical flux of shortwave (i.e., SW) radiation, I , where there are
multiple parallel layers of leaves stacked up into an idealized crown, as shown in the
definition sketch (Figure B2). The downward cumulative (one-sided) leaf area per unit
of ground area (i.e., the leaf area index) is L , and for a geometrically homogeneous
crown of leaves having L ≡ Lt at the crown base, the differential leaf area is
d L = Lt dξ, (B3)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXB AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 17:10
114 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE B2 Homogeneous crown with five leaf layers (closed canopy).
and the SW flux, dI, intercepted at given depth into the crown, ξ , by this differential
leaf area, can be written in terms of the shadow area, As :
A�
d I
d L= −As(ξ )I, (B4)
where the minus sign indicates that I decays with downward increasing L . Integrating
equation (B4) downward into the crown from ξ = 0, using equation (B3) and with
I (ξ = 0) being the ambient insolation, I0, and I (ξ ) being the local leaf insolation,
I� (ξ ), we have
I (ξ )∫
I0
d I�(ξ )
I�(ξ )= −
ξ∫
0
As(ξ )
A�
Lt dξ = −Lt
ξ∫
0
κ(ξ )dξ, (B5)
where
κ(ξ ) ≡ shadow area/foliage area. (B6)
Here enters the underlying principal approximation of Monsi and Saeki [1953]: the
realities of nature ensure that As (and hence κ) is an unknown function of ξ , even with
geometrical homogeneity, because (1) the diffuse component of incident radiation will
bring light from a range of directions simultaneously, thereby invalidating the simple
flux relationship of equation (B4), and (2) even for incident beam radiation, the crown
will likely have variably translucent leaves and diffuse reflections from at least the
rough undersurfaces of the leaves.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXB AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 17:10
A P P E N D I X B • T H E H O M O G E N O U S C3 C A N O P Y 115
In a typical zeroth-order approximation, Monsi and Saeki [1953] avoided this
problem by assuming that κ(ξ ) varies linearly with depth, ξ , so that
ξ∫
0
κ(ξ )dξ ∼= ξ
1∫
0
κ(ξ )dξ ≡ ξ κ, (B7)
where κ is the crown-average radiation extinction coefficient, defined at maximum
assimilation rate as
κ = A∗s
A�
. (B8)
With this approximation, we can integrate equation (B5) to obtain the famous
Monsi-Saeki extinction equation:
I�(ξ )
I0= exp(−κLtξ ). (B9)
With the optimum long-term, time-averaged leaf-operating state being I� = Is�, as
has been pointed out in Appendix A (equation (A20)); with the vertical decay of
SW flux, as provided by equation (B9); and with leaf angles varying with elevation,
we recognize that all leaves in a strictly homogeneous multilayered crown cannot
operate optimally at all times. Retaining our homogeneity assumption, we assume
that the crown is optimal in the spatial as well as the temporal average. Accordingly,
we use both hats and overbars in rewriting equation (B1) to define the spatial average
optimum leaf angle over the canopy (as was done for κ), giving
β ≡ cos θ� = A∗s
A�
. (B10)
Note the very important result of these approximations is that under the average
geometrical conditions producing maximum assimilation in our idealized radiation
field,
κ = A∗s
A�
= β, (B11)
as was pointed out by Eagleson [2002], who also showed its limited observational
support, as gathered from the literature [Eagleson, 2002, Figure 3.19]. We will find
equation (B11) to be the key to simplifying the unification of the canopy fluxes of
energy and carbon when considering issues of productivity.
Similarly, I�, the seasonal average leaf SW flux, spatially averaged over the depth
of the crown (due to flux extinction therein) to become ˆI �, is assumed equal to the
optimal operating state for an individual leaf of the given species (Figure A4); that is,
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXB AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 17:10
116 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
for a closed canopy (i.e., water and nutrients not limiting),
ˆI � = Is�. (B12)
With this assumption, equation (B9) yields
Is�
I0=
ˆI �
I0=
∫ 1
0exp (−κLtξ )dξ = f I (κLt ), (B13)
in which
f I (κLt ) ≡ 1 − e−κLt
κLt. (B14)
Note that at the bottom of the mature crown, where ξ = 1, I�(ξ = 1) ≡ Ik , the
compensation radiation (provided ˆT � = Tm), which is the amount of radiation needed
only to compensate for respiration and thus not provide any net productivity. Then,
from equation (B9),
Ik
I0= exp(−κLt ). (B15)
C 3 species parameters
Since with P� = 0, I� ≡ Ik , and (from Appendix A) Ik ≡ Is�, equation (A1) can be
written, for an isolated bottom leaf at optimum temperature,
Pr
Psm=
Ik
I0
Ik
I0+ Is�
I0
, (B16)
which, together with equations (B13) and (B15), enables us to write
Pr
Psm= f (κLt ). (B17)
Larcher [1983] points out that Pr and Psm are both species constants,which are
fixed here in their separate temperature dependencies by the optimum temperature
associated with Psm . Therefore equation (B17) (together with equation (B11)) tells
us that
κLt = species constant = βLt . (B18)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXB AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 17:10
A P P E N D I X B • T H E H O M O G E N O U S C3 C A N O P Y 117
Bioclimatic function at canopy scale
At leaf scale, we found the functional relation between time averaged local intercepted
radiation, I� = Is�, and species to be (equation (A24))
εi Is�(s)︸ ︷︷ ︸
Photochemicalcarbon demandby average leaf
∼= max{
c∗a [rc(s)] |u0, ra, ca
R�min (s)
}
︸ ︷︷ ︸
Diffusivecarbon supplyto average leaf
, (B19)
in which εi is assumed to be a constant, whereas Is�, rc, and R�min are all species-
dependent.
At canopy scale, we consider first the carbon demand: at this extended vertical
scale and to the zeroth order, we begin with the time averaged behavior of the canopy
average leaf, which intercepts ¯I �, incident PAR per unit of horizontally projected area,
and time. To get total canopy PAR interception, we multiply ¯I � by the amount of hori-
zontally projected leaf area, βLt , stacked vertically to form a vertically homogeneous
canopy, and to maximize the photosynthetic carbon demand of the stable canopy
(at optimum temperature), we set ¯I � = Is�. This expands the left-hand side of equa-
tion (B19) to
max {carbon demand} ≡ max {DC} = εi Is�(s)βLt = εi¯I �(s)βLt = εi I0
(
1 − e−s).
(B20)
Canopy scale is introduced into the carbon supply side (i.e., right-hand side) of
equation (B19) through the “effective” diffusive resistance to the flux of CO2 from the
free atmosphere to the chloroplasts of each of the βLt , vertically stacked, horizontally
projected leaf surfaces comprising the homogeneous crown. Each of these surfaces
has a different flux path, the average resistance of which is R�c, where
R�c = R� + rc + ra, (B21)
(see Figure A2). The individual leaf resistance, R�, is as defined in Appendix A and
is assumed identical for all leaves in the canopy; rc is the average canopy resistance to
diffusive flow through the leaf layers; and ra is the diffusive resistance of the ambient
atmospheric boundary layer. In this zeroth-order approximation, we consider light
as the sole controlling resource, in which case, for maximum productive potential,
all ground area will be leaf covered, making βLt ≥ 1 (this issue is discussed further
in Appendix C). The βLt separate resistance paths are parallel paths in the canopy,
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXB AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 17:10
118 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
assumed identical, so that the appropriate total canopy resistance, Rc, is approximated
by
Rc∼= R�c
βLt
, βLt ≥ 1. (B22)
Following equation (A13) and Figure A3b, we seek the minimum of this resistance
for a given species, s ≡ βLt . As a function of species, this minimum is written
Rcmin (s) = R�cmin
(
βLt
)/
βLt , βLt ≥ 1. (B23)
For the lumped canopy, the effective CO2 concentration is now ca , the (constant)
value in the free atmosphere above the canopy, and using equations (B22) and (B23),
the right-hand side of equation (B19) expands to
max {carbon supply} ≡ max {SC} = max
⎧
⎨
⎩
ca
R�cmin
(
βLt
)/
βLt
⎫
⎬
⎭, βLt ≥ 1,
(B24)
which is the maximum (i.e., saturating) carbon supply of a mature, horizontally and
vertically homogeneous canopy as a function of species, s ≡ βLt .
We assume that in the continuing Darwinian search for increased local reproductive
success, both the local canopy photochemical carbon demand and the local canopy
diffusive carbon supply are optimized independently over evolutionary time through
continuing speciation and adaptation. Whenever one or the other (either local supply
or local demand) is even slightly larger at any given moment due to ongoing adaptation
and mutation, there is an excess of capacity for either carbon assimilation or carbon
supply, and hence there is continued pressure for further local species change to utilize
this excess capacity.
Local evolutionary equilibrium: An hypothesis
Eldredge and Gould [1972] and Gould and Eldredge [1977] have argued that this
speciation occurs at the extremes of the local species distribution and is driven by
extremes in the local forcing (climate in our case). Furthermore, they argue that
these extremes of forcing, being temporally sporadic and separated by long periods
of relative calm, produce a speciation process characterized by “long” periods of
equilibrium separated by “short” periods of change. They called this “punctuated
equilibrium.” Here we describe the conditions defining such equilibrium for the
particular case of C3 vegetation.
We now hypothesize that the Darwinian goal has been reached when the canopy
carbon supply and demand are (simultaneously) not only equal, but also at their
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXB AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 17:10
A P P E N D I X B • T H E H O M O G E N O U S C3 C A N O P Y 119
respective maximum values, and are therefore in what we shall call here “evolutionary
equilibrium.” Equating equations (B20) and (B24), and remembering that s ≡ βLt ,
the statement of canopy-scale evolutionary equilibrium becomes
εi I0(
1 − e−s) = max
{
ca
R�cmin (s)/
s
}
, s ≥ 1. (B25)
With the ambient atmospheric CO2 concentration assumed everywhere the same, we
carry out the maximization on the right-hand side of equation (B25) by requiring that
d
ds
[
ca
R�cmin (s)/
s
]
= 0, s ≥ 1, (B26)
which is satisfied when
R�cmin (s)
s= constant ≡ c h m−1, s ≥ 1. (B27)
Consistent with our earlier assumption that the species variable, s ≡ βLt , is continu-
ous (rather than discrete), and because equation (B26) must be satisfied for all values
of s ≥ 1(for s < 1, a resource other than light, say, water or nutrients, must limit the
canopy, a condition not considered herein), equation (B27) gives, irrespective of I0,
and for constant ca ,
max {DC} = max {SC} = constant, s ≥ 1. (B28)
Using equations (B20), (B27), and (B28), the energy and carbon flux expressions
of maximum productivity can be equated to express this evolutionary equilibrium
in two instructive forms. First, for physical clarity, we separate the forcing climate
variables from the resulting vegetation variables to obtain the “physical” form:
Carbonand oxygen
︷︸︸︷ca
I0︸︷︷︸
Canopy-topSW flux
=Leaf
︷ ︸︸ ︷
εi c︸︷︷︸
C O2
Crown︷ ︸︸ ︷[
1 − e−βLt
]
︸ ︷︷ ︸
InterceptedSW flux
,
︸ ︷︷ ︸
Resources
{
Photo-chemistry
︸ ︷︷ ︸
Diffusion
βLt ≥ 1, (B29)
where, for given ca , the species dependence lies solely in the light diffusion term.
Here the physicochemical biological processes have produced, over evolutionary
time, a structural plant form in optimum evolutionary balance with its environmental
resources. (It is therefore not surprising that field studies of mature plant response to
artificially increased ca show little increase in standing biomass over a few years of
observations [Korner et al., 2005].)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXB AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 17:10
120 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
Second, for use of evolutionary equilibrium herein as a zeroth-order analytical
connection between climate and species, we rewrite equation (B29) as
I0
[
1 − e−βLt
]
︸ ︷︷ ︸
Canopy-interceptedPAR energy
= ε−1i
[ca
c
]
︸ ︷︷ ︸
Canopy-assimilatedcarbon
= constant = Ec, βLt ≥ 1, (B30)
the outside terms of which form the desired univariate bioclimatic function, express-
ing, at canopy scale, the local average species (βLt ) as a function of the single local
climate forcing variable ( I0). This evolutionary equilibrium hypothesis gives an im-
portant new theoretical result, which we will evaluate from observational data by two
independent methods in Appendix C.
Finally, when considering the expected effects of climate change, it may be helpful
to isolate the potential assimilation efficiency, εi , in the revealing form
εi ≡ assimilated carbon
intercepted PAR=
Climaticpotential
︷︸︸︷ca
I0·
Canopy efficiency︷ ︸︸ ︷(
βLt
)/
R�cmin
1 − e−βLt. (B31)
In this form, εi displays its role as the dimensional similarity parameter governing C3
plant growth.
As the ambient CO2 concentration, ca , rises with time, leaf temperature may be
expected to rise also, and biomes that were operating optimally will experience a
decrease in R�cmin [Larcher, 1983, Figure 3.35]. Secondarily, the SW flux may be
reduced by increased scattering and absorption, which will likely induce an increase
in βLt (equation (B30)), and the aggregate expected ecological response is an increase
of plant biomass and perhaps a change to more leafy species.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXC AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 12:15
A P P E N D I X C
Evaluation of the Evolutionary Equilibrium Hypothesis
The equilibrium hypothesis at leaf scale
In equation (A24), we developed the bioclimatic function of that particular stressless,
stable, and maximally productive leaf in a canopy of species, s, to be
Is� (s)︸ ︷︷ ︸
PAR interceptedby average leaf
≈ ε−1i max
{
c∗a [rc (s)]
∣∣u0,ra ,ca
R�min (s)
}
︸ ︷︷ ︸
Diffusivecarbon supplyto average leaf
. (C1)
Evaluation of equation (C1) is difficult, however, due to the unknown functions of
species (s) and position within the canopy (ξ ), and consequently, this leaf-scale
analysis serves only an instructional function.
The equilibrium hypothesis at local canopy scale
In equations (B25)–(B28), after assuming the canopy average leaf to be stressless,
and maximally productive, we further assumed the whole plant to be in a state
of evolutionary equilibrium, in which the maxima of carbon supply and of carbon
demand are equal at plant scale. We write this “evolutionary equilibrium hypothesis”
for the lumped, local, spatially homogeneous canopy as
I0
[
1 − e−βLt
]
︸ ︷︷ ︸
InterceptedPAR energy
= Ec = ε−1i
[
ca
R�cmin
/
βLt
]
︸ ︷︷ ︸
Assimilatedcarbon
. (C2)
121
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXC AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 12:15
122 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
We now obtain independent estimates of the hypothesized constant, Ec, by separate
evaluations of the left-hand side (EcI ) and right-hand side (EcC ) of equation (C2).
On the left-hand side, in columns 2 and 3 of Table A1, values of Is� and Psm
(respectively) are given for a variety of C3 species, as estimated by Eagleson [2002]
by graphically fitting published photosynthetic capacity curves for single leaves. In
column 4 of the same table are values of the species parameter, βLt , again collected
by Eagleson [2002] from the literature, as obtained from full crown or canopy ob-
servations. It is important to note that in some cases, the paired estimates of Is� and
βLt , although from the same species, came from different observers and/or different
stands of the species. Resulting values of intercepted PAR for these species using the
left-hand side of equation (C2) are given in column 5 of Table A1, where we see that
they scatter about a sampled species average, 〈· · ·〉, of
〈Is�βLt 〉 ≡⟨
I0
[
1 − e−βLt
]⟩
= 〈EcI 〉 = 0.61MJparm−2p h−1, (C3)
in which EcI signifies Ec as determined from intercepted PAR and in which (as a
reminder) m2p signifies square meters of projected (i.e., horizontal) canopied area.
For subsequent analysis, we are interested in the variability of Ec across species.
Although eight observations is a very small sample, we calculate the coefficient of
species variation of EcI to be
CV (EcI ) = σ (EcI )
〈EcI 〉 = 0.20. (C4)
We now separately estimate the numerical value of each side of equation (C2). The
right-hand side of equation (C2) is evaluated for sun leaves of four tree species using
observations from the literature, as summarized in Table C1.
Assimilated carbon Turning first to the numerator of the right-hand side of equa-
tion (C2), we have, from Gates [1980],
ca∼= 12.5 mmCO2 m−3 (millimoles of CO2 per cubic meter);
from stoichiometry,
1 mmCO2 ≡ 0.044 gCO2;
and from Penning de Vries et al. [1974], the conversion of assimilated mass of carbon
dioxide to mass of solid matter, gs , is approximated by
gs/
gCO2∼= 0.50.
Thus
ca∼= (12.5) (0.044) (0.5) ∼= 0.275 gs m−3. (C5)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXC AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 12:15
A P P E N D I X C • T H E E V O L U T I O N A R Y E Q U I L I B R I U M H Y P O T H E S I S 123
TABLE C1 Carbon Supply Evidence for Evolutionary Equilibrium in Certain Tree Speciesa
ra (1) r c (2) r�a (3) r smin(3) rm(3) R�cmin
(4) R�cmin
βL t
ca/ε(7)i
R�cmin/βL t= EcC
Species (s m−1) (s m−1) (s m−1) (s m−1) (s m−1) (s m−1) βL t (s m−1) (MJparm−2h−1)
Norway maple(Acerplatanoides)
6.25 6.25 79.7 1350.0 803.3 2245.5 1.73(5) 1298.0 0.47
European whitebirch (Betulaverrucosa)
6.25 6.25 78.6 209.3 610.0 910.4 1.51(6) 602.9 1.02
European aspen(Populustremula)
6.25 6.25 59.3 391.3 750.0 1213.1 1.38(6) 879.1 0.70
Chestnut oak(Quercusrobur)
6.25 6.25 85.5 1980.0 1010.0 3088.0 1.50(5) 2058.7 0.30
Average 1864 1.53 1210 0.62aSuperscripted parenthetical numbers refer to the following: (1) equation (C9); (2) equation (C11); (3)Holmgren et al.
[1965]; (4) equations (C7) and (C8); (5) Baker [1950]; (6) Rauner [1976]. The experimental apparatus and its use is
described by Bjorkman and Holmgren [1963].
From Figure (A7) and equation (A19),
εi = 1.62 gs MJ−1par,
where the radiation is intercepted light, giving
ca/εi = 0.275/1.62 = 0.17 MJpar m−3. (C6)
Leaf andcanopy resistances For the denominator of the right-hand side of equation
(C2), we first turn to equation (B21), from which
R�cmin = R�min + rc + ra. (C7)
We use equations (A7) to obtain
R�min ≡ r�a + rsmin + rm . (C8)
For trees with height, h ≥ 2m, Earth’s atmospheric boundary layer resistance, ra , has
the estimator [Eagleson, 2002]
ra∼=
(
k2u0
)−1, (C9)
in which k = von Karman’s constant (dimensionless) = 0.40 and u0 = atmospheric
“free stream” velocity (meters per second). At the common average wind speed,
u0 = 1 ms−1, equation (C9) gives
ra∼= 6.25 s m−1. (C10)
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXC AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 12:15
124 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
FIGURE C1 Linearity of leaf resistance at canopy scale.
Broad-leaved species have a single stomated surface per leaf, for which Eagleson
[2002] has found rc to satisfy
rc/
ra∼= 1. (C11)
Holmgren et al. [1965] give repeated observed values of the remaining leaf resis-
tances, r�a , rsmin , and rm , for sun leaves of four broad-leaved tree species, the averages
of which are reproduced in Table C1. The desired total resistance, R�cmin , is given
(from equation (C8)) in column 6, and crown-average values of the projected leaf
area, βLt , not measured by Holmgren et al. [1965], are taken from the literature (as
referenced) for the same tree species.
From equation (C2), we see that the zeroth-order condition for constancy of Ec
across all leaves of all species requires R�cmin to be linear in the species variable, βLt .
We explore this linearity in Figure C1 using the observations combined in column
6 of Table C1. In this figure, the solid line represents a linear least squares fit to
the plotted observations of column 6 of Table C1, constrained to pass through the
origin, R�cmin = 0, βLt = 0 [Benjamin and Cornell, 1970], whereas the dashed line
represents the unconstrained linear least squares fit of these same four data points.
Note that this dashed line projects to R�cmin = 0, very close to the minimum full ground
cover condition, βLt = 1, required for canopy utilization of maximum available light
and thus for maximum production per unit ground area.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-APXC AGU001/Eagleson December 11, 2009 12:15
A P P E N D I X C • T H E E V O L U T I O N A R Y E Q U I L I B R I U M H Y P O T H E S I S 125
Returning now to evaluation of the right-hand side of equation (C2) and using
Table C1, the average observed EcC (where EcC means Ec as determined by carbon
flux) is, for this small sample,
〈EcC〉 ≡ ca/εi
〈R�cmin (s)/
βLt〉= 0.62 MJpar m−2
p h−1, (C12)
with a CV = 0.87. Note that the species observed for estimating EcC are different than
those observed for estimating EcI (Table A1), yet their average values of Ec are essen-
tially identical; that is, 〈EcI 〉 = 0.61 MJpar m−2p h−1 and 〈EcC〉 = 0.62 MJpar m−2
p h−1.
Summary
The two independent estimators of E are remarkably close in value. Over the species
range of these observations, 0.37 ≤ βLt ≤ 3.19, E is given by its average:
〈E〉 = 0.62 MJpar m−2p h−1 = 172 Wtot m−2
p , (C13)
with
σE = 0.17 MJparm−2p h−1, (C14)
making
CVE = 0.27. (C15)
For current purposes, we take the species-controlling bioclimatic function from the
left-hand side of equation (C2) as
〈 I0〉⎡
⎣1 − e−⟨
βLt
⟩
1
⎤
⎦ ≡ E1 = 172 Wtot m−2p . (C16)
We note that Enquist and Niklas [2001, p. 655], in extending allometry theory to
closed plant communities, including those of mixed species, found that “the intrinsic
capacity to produce biomass on an annual basis will vary little across communities.”
We find here that biomass productivity is essentially uniform across primary canopies
of a range of communities. Written in the useful form of equation (1.3), that is,
s = g (c) , (C17)
the bioclimatic function of equation (C16) becomes, finally, the univariate “state
equation”⟨
βLt
⟩
1= �n
[1
1 − E1/〈 I0〉]
, 〈 I0〉 > E1 = 172 Wtot m−2p . (C18)
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-NOT AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 12:35
Notation
A area of vegetation community in which species are counted
(m2).
A� one sided leaf area (cm2).
A� spatial average leaf area (cm2).
An projection of leaf area onto a plane perpendicular to the inci-
dent beam radiation (cm2).
Ap leaf area as projected on a horizontal plane (cm2).
As leaf shadow area (cm2).
A(1)s full shadow area of a single leaf (cm2).
A(2)s each leaf’s full shadow area in a two-leaf system (cm2).
A∗s optimum full shadow area of leaf (see Figure B1) (cm2).
A∗s spatial average optimum full shadow area (cm2).
a coefficient.
C3 class of vegetation utilizing the Calvin-Benson photochemi-
cal pathway.
C4 class of vegetation utilizing the Hatch-Slack photochemical
pathway.
CAM class of vegetation utilizing the Crassulacean acid metabolism
photochemical pathway.
CO2 carbon dioxide.
c local constant in the “species-area” relationship (m−2z).
c local (i.e., pixel) randomly time-variable climate.
c ≡ E(c) time average of local climate.
c∗a = ca ambient concentration of CO2 (gCO2
m−3).
127
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-NOT AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 12:35
128 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
cc leaf average concentration of CO2 in the chloroplasts
(gCO2m−3).
ci i th climatic forcing variable.
ci temporal mean of the i th climatic forcing variable.
cm ≡ c mass density of the diffusant CO2 (gCO2m−3).
DC saturating carbon demand (gCO2m−2 h−1).
E ≡ E1 SW flux intercepted by the primary canopy = 172 Wtot m−2.
Ec canopy-intercepted PAR flux at “evolutionary equilibrium”
(W m−2) and its equivalent, canopy-assimilated carbon flux
at “evolutionary equilibrium” (gs m−2 h−1).
EcC optimum canopy-assimilated carbon flux at evolutionary
equilibrium (see Figure B3) (W m−2).
EcI optimum SW flux (PAR) intercepted by canopy at evolution-
ary equilibrium (W m−2).
E1 solar energy intercepted by primary canopy of light-limited
forest (W m−2).
e base (2.718. . . ) of natural logarithm.
F(n) probability mass of normal distribution at n standard devia-
tions from mean (see Figure 3.6).
G (κ, λh) two-parameter Gamma function (dimensionless).
gCO2 grams of assimilated CO2.
gs grams of solid plant matter.
h depth of canopy (m).
h j random amount of SW radiant energy intercepted by a
species-supporting cloud event, i0 ≤ I0 (W h m−2).
ha hectare, a measure of land area (1 ha = 104 m2).
I SW flux (quantity of SW solar energy intercepted by given
surface in given time) (W m−2).
Ik I� (ξ = 1) (W m−2).
I� photosynthetically active SW flux intercepted per unit time
by leaf (Wpar m−2).
I� seasonal average SW flux intercepted by leaf (W m−2).
I� canopy average SW flux intercepted by the leaf (W m−2).ˆI � crown average of the seasonal average SW flux intercepted
by leaf (W m−2).¯I � time average of the canopy average SW flux intercepted by
the leaf (W m−2).
I ∗� particular value of seasonal average intercepted SW flux (Fig-
ure A4b) (W m−2).
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-NOT AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 12:35
N O T A T I O N 129
I0 local pixel growing-seasonal-average canopy-top SW flux in
a given year (W m−2).
I0k pixel annual SW flux in year k (W m−2).
I −0 SW flux at � = �+ (see Figure 3.3) (W m−2).
I0 or I0 long-term time average of local pixel growing-seasonal
canopy-top SW flux (W m−2).
I +0 average SW flux at � = �+ (Figure 3.16a) (W m−2).
I 00 local maximum of the seasonal average SW flux, located at
�00 (Figure 3.16b) (W m−2).
I L0 mean annual SW flux at �0
L (Figure 3.16b) (W m−2).
I R0 mean annual SW flux at �0
R (Figure 3.16b) (W m−2).
Is� species parameter measuring the leaf effectiveness in utilizing
SW flux (Figure A1) (Wpar m−2).
Is�1, Is�2 leaf effectiveness of species 1 and 2 in utilizing SW flux
(Figure A4b) (Wpar m−2).
Is�(βLt ) SW flux intercepted by crown-average leaf of the local average
species (Wtot m−2).
I� SW flux at the top of the atmosphere during daylight in the
growing season (W m−2).
I� time average (June–September, inclusive) of I� at each lati-
tude (W m−2).
i0 instantaneous pixel-average SW flux at canopy top (W m−2).
j counting variable.
KCO2 spatially averaged (along the flow path) value of the CO2 mass
diffusivity (m2 s−1).
Km ≡ KCO2 mass diffusivity of CO2 (m2 s−1).
k von Karman’s constant =0.40 (dimensionless).
k number of years of record (dimensionless).
kgs kilograms solid.
L or LAI leaf area index, one-sided leaf area per unit of ground area
(dimensionless).
Lt leaf area index of a crown.
M = m2p/m2 canopy density (dimensionless).
mh mean of SW flux intercepted by a species-supporting cloud
event (W h m−2).
m2p horizontal projection of canopied area (m2).
m R(ν) mean of R(ν) (W h m−2).
m Rτ≡ E[Rτ ] mean of Rτ and R(τ ) (W h m−2).
mtb mean time between cloud events (hours).
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-NOT AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 12:35
130 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
mtc mean duration of cloud event (hours).
mν mean number of species-supporting events in mτ .
mτ daylight length of local average annual growing season
(h yr−1).
N.A. North America.
N.H. Northern Hemisphere.
nI number of standard deviations away from the mean annual
insolation, I0 (W2 m−4).
n I latitudinal average number of standard deviations away from
the mean annual, I0.
ni number of standard deviations of ν above the local mean at
which new species can no longer be identified.
ns number of standard deviations, σs , away from the mean
species.
P� net rate of leaf photosynthesis (gCO2 m−2 h−1).
Pr rate of nighttime respiratory release of CO2 (i.e., “dark” res-
piration) (gCO2 m−2 h−1).
Ps light-saturated rate of photosynthesis at given temperature
(Figure A1) (gCO2 m−2 h−1).
Psm maximum light-saturated rate of photosynthesis (i.e., at opti-
mum temperature, Tm) (gCO2 m−2 h−1).
Pt total rate of assimilation of CO2 (i.e., the photosynthetic ca-
pacity) (gCO2 m−2projected leaf area h−1).
P0 relative leaf productivity or efficiency P�/Psm (dimension-
less).
PAR photosynthetically active radiation (Wpar m−2 ≈ 1/2Wtot m−2
= 1/2W m−2).
p�|τ (ν) discrete probability that exactly ν species-supporting events
will occur.
Qm ≡ QCO2 CO2 mass flux density (gm−2 s−1).
R intensity of beam radiation (W m−2).
R generic range (deg latitude).
R(ν) total SW radiant energy intercepted by a random number, ν,
of species-supporting cloud events, i0 ≤ I0 (W h m−2).
R(τ ) total SW flux intercepted in season of length, τ (W h m−2).
Rτ total SW flux intercepted in season of length, τ (W h m−2).
Rc total canopy CO2 flux path resistance (s m−1).
Rcmin minimum total canopy CO2 flux path resistance (s m−1).
R� CO2 flux path resistance of individual leaf in crown (s m−1).
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-NOT AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 12:35
N O T A T I O N 131
←→R� variable, total (i.e., mesophyll + diffusive) resistance of single
leaf (s m−1).
R�c average resistance of the separate leaf CO2 flux paths in a
homogeneous crown (s m−1).
R�min minimum value of the individual leaf variable resistance
(s m−1).
R�cmin minimum average resistance of the separate leaf CO2 flux
paths in a homogeneous crown (s m−1).
Rs range of modal species at � = �◦ (deg).
Rs|�◦(�) ≡ range in degrees latitude of species, s ≡ βLt , at a local site
having � = �◦.
Rs|�◦(�) ≡ range in degrees latitude of the mean species, s ≡ βLt , at
a local site of latitude �◦.Rs (�◦) ≡ Rs|�◦(�) ≡ Rs range in degrees latitude of the modal
species, s, at a local site of latitude �◦.
Rs|�◦(�) ≡ Rs (�◦) ≡ Rs range in degrees latitude of the modal
species, s, at a local site of latitude �◦.
R p
s|�0 (� = 0) range in degrees latitude of the modal species, s, at � =0, projected from the range gradient at high latitudes in an
imaginary world having low-moisture atmosphere.
Rs|�◦(�) mean of the ranges in degrees of all species, βLt , at a local
site at �◦.
R〈s〉|�◦(�) ≡ range in degrees of the zonal average local mean species,
〈s〉, at �◦.
Rss|�◦(�) sample (superscript s) zonal average range of species, s, in
zone �0 (deg latitude).
R�◦ = �◦ − �− range of mean species at � = �◦ (deg).
R s|�00
range (identically zero) of the most frequent (i.e., modal)
species occurring at a maximum of I0(�) (deg).
R s|�0L
that part of the range of the least frequent (i.e., largest) species
occurring at a maximum of I0(�) that is found on the rising
(i.e., left-hand) branch of I0(�) (deg).
R s|�0R
that part of the range of the least frequent (i.e., largest) species
occurring at a maximum of I0(�) that is found on the falling
(i.e., right-hand) branch of I0(�) (deg).
RN (�0) Northern Hemisphere portion of range that straddles the equa-
tor (deg).
RNs|�0 northern portion of the range of the most frequent (i.e., modal)
species occurring at a minimum of I0(�) (deg).
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-NOT AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 12:35
132 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
r amount of SW flux intercepted by � cloud events (W m−2).
ra atmospheric boundary layer resistance (s m−1).
rb� = ra + r�a boundary layer resistance (s m−1).
rc canopy (i.e., interleaf) resistance (s m−1).←→rd diffusive resistance (s m−1).
ri intercellular stomatal resistance (s m−1).
r�a leaf boundary layer resistance (s m−1).
rm leaf mesophyll resistance (s m−1).←→rs = ←→
rso + ri∼= ←→
rso variable stomatal resistance (s m−1).
rsmin minimum stomatal resistance (s m−1).←→rso variable stomatal opening resistance (s m−1).
SC saturating carbon supply to leaf (gCO2 m−2 h−1).
SC saturating carbon supply to a mature homogeneous canopy
(gCO2 m−2 h−1).
SE standard error of estimate.
S.H. Southern Hemisphere.
SW shortwave radiative flux = Wtot m−2 or W m−2.
s = βLt = g(c), numerical representation of optimally sup-
ported vegetation species (dimensionless).
s ≡ E(s) = βLt = g(c), local community-average species (dimen-
sionless).
s�0 local average species at latitude �0.
s local modal (i.e., most frequent) species (dimensionless).
T0 daylight ambient temperature (◦C).
T0 growing season time-average daylight ambient surface tem-
perature (◦C).
T� leaf temperature (◦C).
T� optimum average temperature of leaf-intercepting crown-
averaged SW flux, ˆI � (◦C).ˆT � local species time (growing season) and canopy-average leaf
temperature (◦C).
Tm leaf temperature at which light-saturated rate of net photosyn-
thesis is maximized (◦C), and (Figure 3.17 only) mean daily
maximum atmospheric temperature at surface.
tb duration of rectangular pulses of SW flux for which i0 > I0
(hours).
tc duration of rectangular pulses of SW flux for which i0 ≤ I0
(hours).
u0 free stream wind speed (m s−1).
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-NOT AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 12:35
N O T A T I O N 133
Wpar m−2 photosynthetically active radiative flux ∼= 1/2Wtot m−2.
Wtot m−2 ≡ W m−2 SW radiative flux.
x position along the flux path (m).
z vertical distance from base of canopy (m).
z locally constant exponent of the area in the “species-area”
relationship (dimensionless).
max{DC} maximum carbon demand of a mature homogeneous canopy
(gCO2 m−2 h−1).
max{SC} maximum (i.e., saturating) carbon supply of a mature homo-
geneous canopy, (gCO2 m−2 h−1).
� (κ) single-parameter gamma function (dimensionless).
angle between beam radiation and a normal to the leaf surface
(deg).
�c minimum total canopy resistance (h m−1).
α angle between beam radiation and the horizontal (i.e., angle
of incidence) (deg).
αc fraction of season experiencing i0 ≤ I0 (dimensionless).
αT absorption coefficient, (dimensionless).
β cosine of the leaf angle, θ� (deg).
β spatial average cosine of the leaf angle (deg).
δ solar declination (deg).
E dimensionless ecodynamic similarity parameter for latitudi-
nal dispersion of C3 plants.
εi = Psm/Is� potential utilization efficiency of intercepted light (also
called potential photochemical efficiency) (gCO2 W−1 h−1 or
gs MJ−1tot ).
εi average across all woody C3 species of potential utilization
efficiency of intercepted light (gCO2 MJ−1tot or gs MJ−1
par).
η ≡ m−1h (W−1 h−1 m2).
� number of cloud events that together can intercept r species–
supporting energy in time, t = τ.
θ� leaf angle with the horizontal (deg).
κ leaf shadow area/leaf foliage area ≡ radiation extinction co-
efficient (dimensionless).
κ shape parameter of the gamma distribution of local SW flux
event arrivals (hj ) (dimensionless).
κ crown average of the radiation extinction coefficient at max-
imum assimilation rate (equals A∗s / A�) at which it equals β
(dimensionless).
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-NOT AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 12:35
134 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
κ geographical average of the gamma shape parameter from
observed series of rainstorm arrivals.
κ (2) shadow area/foliage area in two-leaf system (dimensionless).
κν = νκ (see equation 4.12).
λ scale parameter of the gamma distribution of the hj (W−1tot
h−1 m2).
λν = λ.
ν number of species-supporting local SW flux events, i0 ≤ I0,
in the growing season.
ν = gs/g = 0.5.
νmax maximum number of discrete local SW flux disturbances in
the growing season, mτ .
ξ dimensionless depth downward into crown (ξ =1 at base of
canopy) (m).
ρa mass density of air (mass of air per unit volume of air).
σ( ) standard deviation of ( ).
σE standard deviation of SW flux intercepted by primary canopy
(Wtot m−2).
σI0 standard deviation over time of the local (pixel) seasonal SW
flux (W m−2).
σ I0standard deviation (over the zonal pixels) of the time average
of the annual pixel SW flux (W m−2).⟨
σI0
⟩
zonal average of the standard deviation (over time) of the
average (for each year) pixel SW flux (W m−2).⟨
σI0
⟩
meridional average of the zonal averages of the standard de-
viation (over time) of the average (for each year) pixel SW
flux (W m−2).
σR(ν) standard deviation of R (ν) = (νκ)1/2/λ (W h m−2).
σh standard deviation of h = κ1/2/λ (W h m−2).
σs(�) standard deviation of local species in latitude units.
σs(βLt ) = σs(s) standard deviation of local species in species units.
σs(�−) ≡ σs|�−(�) standard deviation of species at latitude �− in latitude units.
σ s|� standard deviation of s at latitude �.
σs|�−(�) ≡ σs(�−) standard deviation of species at latitude �− in latitude units.
σs|�+(�) ≡ σs(�+) standard deviation of species at latitude �+ in latitude units.
σμ standard deviation of the resistance of sun leaves (s m−1).
σν standard deviation of the number of local SW flux events in
mτ .
σ〈I0〉 standard deviation (over time) of the zonal average of the
average (for each year) pixel SW flux (W m−2).
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-NOT AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 12:35
N O T A T I O N 135
σ 2( ) variance of ( ).
σ 2Rs
s|�◦ (�) variance of the sample range of species, s, in zone �0.
τ daylight-hour length of the local growing season (hours).
ψ carbon concentration in air (mass of carbon per unit mass of
air, dimensionless).
ω seasonal rate of cloud event arrivals (h−1).
� latitude (deg).
�◦ latitude of modal species whose range is being sought (Figures
1.4, 3.1, and 3.5) (deg).
�− latitude where largest species is the modal species at �◦ (Fig-
ures 1.4 and 3.1) (deg).
�+ latitude where the smallest species is the modal species at �◦
(Figures 1.4, 3.1, and 3.5) (deg).
�0L latitude south of SW flux maximum at which mean annual
SW flux is the minimum annual SW flux at the latitude, �00,
of the SW maximum (Figure 3.16b) (deg).
�0R latitude north of SW flux maximum at which mean annual
SW flux is the minimum annual SW flux at the latitude, �00,
of the SW maximum (Figure 3.16b) (deg).
�00 latitude of SW flux maximum (deg).
βLt species-defining total leaf area of plant per unit of horizontal
area (equals κLt ), i.e., “projected” leaf area index; corre-
sponds to the climate in that pixel during a particular growing
season (dimensionless).
βLt pixel average species (i.e., average of the local species distri-
bution) (dimensionless).
βL+t largest stable species at �0 (Figure 3.3).
ωτ ≡ mν mean number of zonal arrivals of SW flux events per season.
ωτ ≡ σ 2ν variance of number of zonal arrivals of SW flux events per
season.
(· · ·) increment of (· · ·).COVz[ . . . ] zonal covariance of [. . . ].
CV(· · ·) coefficient of variation of (· · ·).CV I0
(�) coefficient of zonal variation of temporal mean seasonal pixel
canopy-top SW flux at latitude �.
E (· · ·) expected value of (· · ·).max{· · ·} maximum of {· · ·}.
VAR(· · ·) variance of (· · ·).f (· · ·) functional notation.
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-NOT AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 12:35
136 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
f I (· · ·) the relationship of I as a function of (· · ·).f I0
(�) the relationship of I0 as a function of �.
fR(ν)(r ) pdf of R (ν).
fR(τ )(r ) pdf of R(τ ).
G (κ, λh) gamma probability distribution of the energy intercepted by
a species-supporting cloud event (dimensionless).
G R(ν)(λr ) dimensionless pdf of R(ν).
g (· · ·) a function of (· · ·).g(c) bioclimatic function.
gσI (· · ·) the relationship of σI0 as a function of (· · ·).h(�) = s one-to-one functional relationship between s and �.
hn (· · ·) the relationship of n as a function of (· · ·).�n (· · ·) natural logarithm of (· · ·).max�s potential number of local species (assumed ≤ maximum num-
ber of discrete local SW flux disturbances, νmax, in the grow-
ing season).⟨
d I0d�
⟩
zonal average of the latitudinal (i.e., meridional) gradients of
the time average of the annual pixel SW flux (W m−2 deg−1).d〈 I0〉
d�latitudinal (i.e., meridional) gradient of the zonal aver-
age of the time-averaged annual pixel canopy-top SW flux
(W m−2 deg−1).
pdf probability density function.
P� departure of the net rate of photosynthesis from its asymptotes
(Figure A3c) (gCO2 m−2 h−1).
(· · ·) increment of (· · ·).�s number of local species.
|· · ·| absolute value of · · ·.〈· · ·〉 zonal average of · · ·.〈· · ·〉 ≡ 〈· · ·〉 time average of the zonal average of · · ·, equal to the
zonal average of the time average of · · ·.· · · average of . . . over a stated area.
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-GLOS AGU001/Eagleson December 9, 2009 16:52
Glossary
Abundance: Number of organisms of a given species per unit of area.
Allometry: Defines the relation between size and shape of objects and classes thereof.
Assimilation: Uptake of CO2 by plant for photosynthesis.
Bioclimatic function: Mathematical relationship defining plant species, s, resulting
from specific climatic forcing, c, i.e., s = g(c).
Biome: “A major type of natural vegetation that occurs wherever a particular set of
climatic and edaphic conditions prevail but that may have different taxa in different
regions” [Brown and Gibson, 1983, p. 558].
C3: The pentose phosphate pathway (i.e., Calvin-Benson cycle) for CO2 assimilation:
saturates at high light intensity; used by most plants, including most agricultural
crops and trees (both hardwoods and conifers).
C4: The dicarboxylic acid (i.e., Hatch-Slack) pathway for CO2 assimilation; utilizes
even the most intense solar radiation; tropical grasses and agricultural plants such
as millet, sorghum, and maize.
CAM: The Crassulacean acid metabolism pathway for CO2 assimilation; minimizes
water loss, opening stomata to take up CO2 only during the cooler nighttime;
succulent plants such as cacti.
Canopy density: Fraction of land surface covered by horizontal projection of crowns.
Chloroplast: A small, chlorophyll-containing mass in a plant cell.
Climate: Temporal and spatial variation of the pixel SW flux during the growing
season.
Combinatorics: The branch of mathematics studying the enumeration, combination,
and permutation of sets of elements and the mathematical relations that characterize
their properties.
137
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-GLOS AGU001/Eagleson December 9, 2009 16:52
138 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
Community: A local land surface area of homogeneous properties and unspecified
size.
Compensation radiation: That light intensity at which photosynthesis fixes an
amount of CO2 just equal to that given up in respiration.
Compensation ratio: Compensation SW flux divided by canopy-top SW flux.
Cytoplasm: The protoplasm of a leaf cell (excluding the nucleus).
Diversity: The number of local species per unit area.
Dormancy: A state of temporary inactivity.
Ecosystem: A biological community plus the physical environment that it occupies.
Edaphic: Related to or caused by particular soil conditions.
Envelope: Line connecting the maximum values of the dependent variable at each
value of the independent variable.
Evenness: An ecosystem descriptor of the degree of equality in the number of each
species present (i.e., “high” or “low” evenness).
Evolutionary equilibrium: Proposed optimal state of plant growth at which its
demand for and supply of CO2 are at once equal and at their maximum values.
Gedankenexperiment (thought experiment): “A device of the imagination used
to investigate the nature of things” [Brown, 2007] (see http://plato.stanford.edu/
entries/thought-experiment/).
Germinate: To begin to grow or develop; to sprout forth.
Hectare: 10,000 m2.
Insolation (incoming solar radiation): The rate at which direct solar radiation is
received at the canopy top.
Mean: Numerical average of all observations.
Meridional: Along a line of constant longitude.
Mesophyll: Plant tissue forming the interior parts of a leaf.
Metacommunity: The biogeographic unit in which most member species spend their
entire evolutionary lifetimes (the Amazon basin or the arctic tundra, for example).
Michaelis-Menten equation: Equation (A1), also called the “photosynthetic capacity
curve.”
Modal: Element of a distribution having the largest frequency of occurrence.
Moment: (Mathematical) property such as mean and variance of a distributed
variable.
Monocultural: Single species.
NDVI: Normalized Difference Vegetation Index.
Neutral Theory: Assumes that all individuals of every species in a nutritionally
defined community obey exactly the same ecological rules [Hubbell, 2001]; how-
ever, these ecological rules are unspecified, thus requiring model calibration using
field observations of the vegetation. (We use this dual capitalization herein when
intending this strict Hubbell definition.)
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-GLOS AGU001/Eagleson December 9, 2009 16:52
G L O S S A R Y 139
neutral theory or “neutral theory”: Used with respect to the theory developed
herein, yielding latitudinal distributions of both local species richness and the
range of the local modal species under a defined (but approximate) bioclimatic
forcing.
NPP: Net primary productivity.
PAR: Photosynthetically active solar radiation, normally taken to be one-half total
SW radiative flux.
pdf: Probability density function.
Photoperiod: The interval in a 24-hour period during which a plant is exposed to
light.
Photosynthetically active SW flux, Wpar m−2: That fraction of the total shortwave
radiation, Wtot m−2 or just W m−2, that is involved in the photosynthetic process.
Pixel: Earth surface area covered by a single remotely sensed snapshot from an
orbiting satellite (77,312 km2 in this work).
Potential photochemical efficiency: εi = Psm/Is�; also called “climatic assimilation
potential” or “potential assimilation efficiency.”
Projected area: Total area times the cosine of the angle of the area with the horizontal.
Range: The continuous interval of latitude over which the mean or modal species at
another latitude is found.
Rapoport’s rule: The name given by Stevens [1989] to the observed correlation
between latitude and north-south range for a variety of taxa.
Realizable species: A species that is unstressed by the average growing season
insolation to which it is exposed.
Respiration: The process by which plants take up O2 and release CO2.
Richness: The maximum number of separate species that can be supported locally.
RUE: Radiation utilization efficiency (i.e., PAR conversion efficiency).
Scaling: The property of obeying a power law (adj.); proportioning (v.).
Shade leaves: Leaves with single-layered palisade cells resulting in low unit area
assimilation rates.
Species: Plant having a distinctive projected leaf area.
Species abundance: Number of individuals of the species per unit area (usually the
hectare).
Species diversity: Number of different species in a particular area each weighted by
its abundance.
Species evenness: Relative abundance with which each species is represented in an
area.
Species richness: Number of different species in a particular area of unlimiting
size.
Species supporting: Condition compatible with stability of particular species.
Specular: Nondiffusive.
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-GLOS AGU001/Eagleson December 9, 2009 16:52
140 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
Stomata: The small orifices in the epidermis of leaves.
Sun leaves: Leaves with multilayered palisade cells resulting in high unit area assim-
ilation rates.
SW flux: The rate at which the total shortwave solar energy arrives at a surface
per unit time and per unit area, Wtot m−2 or just W m−2. (Although the solar
spectral division is somewhat arbitrary, the PAR component is commonly taken as
approximately 1/2 Wtot m−2.)
Taxa: Plural of “taxon”; a grouping of like organisms in a systematic biological (in
this case) classification system.
Thought experiment: See Gedankenexperiment.
Total SW solar radiative flux: Approximately twice PAR.
Understory: Any canopy beneath the primary (i.e., topmost) canopy.
Vascular plants: Those plants having special tissues for conducting water, minerals,
and photosynthetic products through the plant from soil to leaf (e.g., ferns, flowering
plants, trees); nonvascular plants have no roots, stems, or leaves (e.g., mosses, green
algae, liverwort).
Visible radiation: The photosynthetically active half of the total SW flux.
Zeroth order: “First approximation”; as used here, it implies use of the simplest
mathematical formulations such as single independent variables and locally linear
functions.
Zonal: Concerning all land surface pixels at a constant latitude (actually over pixel
width of 5◦ meridionally).
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-BIB AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 17:35
Bibliography
Allen, L. H., Jr., and E. R. Lemon (1976), Carbon dioxide exchange and turbulence in a CostaRican tropical rain forest, in Vegetation and the Atmosphere, vol. 2, Case Studies, edited byJ. L. Monteith, pp. 269–308, Academic Press, New York.
Anderson, P. W. (1972), More is different, Science, 177, 393–396.
Bailey, R. G. (1997), Ecoregions of North America (Revised Map), U.S. Dept. of Agric. For.Serv., Washington, D. C.
Baker, F. S. (1950), Principles of Silviculture, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Benjamin, J. R., and C. A. Cornell (1970), Probability, Statistics, and Decision for CivilEngineers, 684 pp., McGraw-Hill, New York.
Berliand, T. G., and L. A. Strokina (1980), Global Distribution of Total Cloudiness, 71 pp.,Gidrometeoizdat, Leningrad, Russia.
Bird, R. B., W. Stewart, and E. N. Lightfoot (2002), Transport Phenomena, 895 pp., JohnWiley, New York.
Birkebak, R., and R. Birkebak (1964), Solar radiation characteristics of tree leaves, Ecology,45, 646–649.
Bjorkman, J. F., and P. Holmgren (1963), Adaptability of the photosynthetic apparatus to lightintensity in ecotypes from exposed and shaded habitats, Physiol. Plant., 16, 889–914.
Bonan, G. B. (2002), Ecological Climatology: Concepts and Applications, 678 pp., CambridgeUniv. Press, Cambridge, U. K.
Brockman, C. F. (1968), Trees of North America: A Field Guide to the Major Native andIntroduced Species North of Mexico, edited by H. S. Zim, Golden Press, New York.
Brown, J. H., and A. C. Gibson (1983), Biogeography, 643 pp., C. V. Mosby, St. Louis, Mo.
Brown, J. H., and A. Kodric-Brown (1977), Turnover rates in insular biogeography: Effect ofimmigration on extinction, Ecology, 58, 445–449.
141
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-BIB AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 17:35
142 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
Brown, J. R. (2007), Thought experiments, in The Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy,Summer 2007 ed., edited by E. N. Zalta, Stanford Univ. Press, Stanford, Calif. (Available athttp://plato.stanford.edu/entries/thought-experiment/)
Canadian Climate Program (1982), Canadian Climate Normals, vol. 2, Temperature: 1951–1980, 306 pp., Can. Clim. Cent., Downsview, Ont.
Canadian Climate Program (1984), Canadian Climate Normals, vol. 8, Atmospheric Pressure,Temperature, and Humidity, 1951–1980, 334 pp., Can. Clim. Cent., Downsview, Ont.
Cannell, M. G. R., R. Milne, L. J. Sheppard, and M. H. Unsworth (1987), Radiation interceptionand productivity of willow, J. Appl. Ecol., 24, 261–278.
Caro, R., and P. S. Eagleson (1981), Estimating aquifer recharge due to rainfall, J. Hydrol., 53,185–211.
Carpenter, S. R., R. DeFries, T. Dietz, H. A. Mooney, S. Polasky, W. V. Reid, and R. J. Scholes(2006), Millennium ecosystem assessment: Research needs, Science, 314, 257–258.
Connor, E. F., and E. D. McCoy (1979), The statistics and biology of the species-area relation-ship, Am. Nat., 13, 791–833.
Cox, D. R., and P. A. W. Lewis (1966), The Statistical Analysis of Series of Events, Methuen,London.
Currie, D. J., and V. Paquin (1987), Large-scale biogeographical patterns of species richnessof trees, Nature, 329, 326–327.
Davis, S. D., S. J. M. Droop, P. Gregerson, L. Henson, C. J. Leon, J. L. Villa-Lobos, H. Synge,and J. Zantovska (1986), Plants in Danger: What Do We Know?, Int. Union for Conserv. ofNat. and Nat. Resour., Gland, Switzerland.
de Laubenfels, D. I. (1975), Mapping the World’s Vegetation, 246 pp., Syracuse Univ. Press,Syracuse, N. Y.
Eagleson, P. S. (1978), Climate, soil, and vegetation: 2. The distribution of annual precipitationderived from observed storm sequences, Water Resour. Res., 14, 713–721.
Eagleson, P. S. (2002), Ecohydrology: Darwinian Expression of Vegetation Form and Function,443 pp., Cambridge Univ. Press, New York.
Ehleringer, J. (1985), Annuals and perennials of warm deserts, in Physiological Ecology ofNorth American Plant Communities, edited by B. F. Chabot and H. A. Mooney, pp. 162–180,Chapman and Hall, New York.
Ehleringer, J., and T. E. Cerling (2002), C3 and C4 photosynthesis, in Encyclopedia of GlobalEnvironmental Change, vol. 2, edited by H. A. Mooney and J. G. Canadell, pp. 186–190, JohnWiley, Chichester, U. K.
Eldredge, N., and S. J. Gould (1972), Punctuated equilibria: An alternative to phyletic grad-ualism, in Models in Paleobiology, edited by T. J. M. Schopf, pp. 82–115, Freeman Cooper,San Francisco, Calif.
El-Hemry, I. I. (1980), Water balance estimates of the Machar Marshes, S.M. thesis, 223 pp.,Mass. Inst. of Technol., Cambridge, Mass.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-BIB AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 17:35
B I B L I O G R A P H Y 143
Enquist, B. J., and J. Niklas (2001), Invariant scaling relations across tree-dominated commu-nities, Nature, 410, 655–660.
Fischer, A. G. (1960), Latitudinal variations in organic diversity, Evolution, 14, 64–81.
Gates, D. M. (1980), Biophysical Ecology, 611 pp., Springer, New York.
Gentry, A. H. (1988), Changes in plant community diversity and floristic composition onenvironmental and geographic gradients, Ann. Miss. Bot. Gar., 75, 1–34.
Gentry, A. H. (1995), Patterns of diversity and floristic composition in neotropical montaneforests, in Neotropical and Montane Forests: Biodiversity and Conservation, edited by S. P.Churchill et al., pp. 103–126, New York Botanical Garden, New York.
Gosse, G., C. Varlet-Grancher, R. Bonhomme, M. Chartier, J. M. Allirand, and G. Lemaire(1986), Production maximale de matere seche et rayonnement solaire intercepte par un couvertvegetal, Agronomie, 6, 47–56.
Gould, S. J., and N. Eldredge (1977), Punctuated equilibria: The tempo and mode of evolutionreconsidered, Paleobiology, 3, 115–151.
Hanneberg, P. (Ed.) (2000), Our Struggle for Water, Stockholm Int. Water Inst., Stockholm.
Harte, J. (2002), Toward a synthesis of the Newtonian and Darwinian world views, Phys.Today, 55(10), 29–34.
Hawk, K. L., and P. S. Eagleson (2002), Climatology of station storm rainfall in the continentalUnited States: Parameters of the Bartlett-Lewis and Poisson rectangular pulses models (withdiskette), Parsons Lab. Rep. 336, Dept. of Civ. Eng. Mass. Inst. of Technol., Cambridge, Mass.
Holmgren, P., P. G. Jarvis, and M. S. Jarvis (1965), Resistances to carbon dioxide and watervapour transfer in leaves of different plant species, Physiol. Plant., 18, 557–573.
Horn, H. S. (1971), The Adaptive Geometry of Trees, 144 pp., Princeton Univ. Press, Princeton,N. J.
Hubbell, S. P. (2001), The Unified Neutral Theory of Biodiversity and Biogeography, 375 pp.,Princeton Univ. Press, Princeton, N. J.
Hubbell, S. P., H. Fangliang, R. Condit, L. Borda-de-Agua, J. Kellner, and H. ter Steege (2008),How many tree species are there in the Amazon and how many of them will go extinct?, Proc.Natl. Acad. Sci. U. S. A., 105, 11,498–11,504.
Huston, M. A. (1994), Biological Diversity, 681 pp., Cambridge Univ. Press, New York.
Jarvis, P. G., G. B. James, and J. J. Landsberg (1976), Coniferous forest, in Vegetation andthe Atmosphere, vol. 2, Case Studies, edited by J. L. Monteith, pp. 171–240, Academic Press,New York.
Keely, J. E. (1999), Photosynthetic pathway diversity in a seasonal pool community, Funct.Ecol., 13, 106–118.
Korner, C., R. Asshoff, O. Bignucolo, S. Hattenschwiler, S. G. Keel, S. Pelaez-Riedl, S. Pepin,R. T. W. Siegwolf, and G. Zotz (2005), Carbon flux and growth in mature deciduous foresttrees exposed to elevated CO2, Science, 309, 1360–1362.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-BIB AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 17:35
144 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
Kraft, N. J. B., R. Valencia, and D. D. Ackerly (2008), Functional traits and niche-based treecommunity assembly in an Amazonian forest, Science, 322, 580–582.
Kramer, P. J., and W. S. Clark (1947), A comparison of photosynthesis in individual pineneedles and entire seedlings at various light intensities, Plant Physiol., 22, 51–57.
Kramer, P. J., and J. P. Decker (1944), Relation between light intensity and rate of photosynthesisof loblolly pine and certain hardwoods, Plant Physiol., 19, 350–358.
Kramer, P. J., and T. T. Kozlowski (1960), Physiology of Trees, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Kussell, E., and S. Leibler (2005), Phenotypic diversity, population growth, and informationin fluctuating environments, Science, 309, 2075–2078.
Landsberg, J. J., and P. G. Jarvis (1973), A numerical investigation of the momentum balanceof a spruce forest, J. Appl. Ecol., 10, 645–655.
Landsberg, J. J., P. G. Jarvis, and M. B. Slater (1973), The radiation regime of a spruce forest,in Plant Response to Climatic Factors: Proceedings of the Uppsala Symposium, edited by R.O. Slatyer, pp. 411–418, UNESCO, Paris.
Larcher, W. (1983), Physiological Plant Ecology, corrected 2nd ed., trans. by M. A. Biederman-Thorson, Springer, Berlin.
Larcher, W. (1995), Physiological Plant Ecology, 3rd ed., trans. by J. Wieser, Springer, Berlin.
Legg, B., and J. L. Monteith (1975), Heat and mass transfer within plant canopies, in Heat andMass Transfer in the Biosphere, vol. 1, Transfer Processes in the Plant Environment, edited byD. A. deVries and N. H. Afgan, pp. 167–186, Scripta, Washington, D. C.
Li, M., X. Yi, L. Li, and X. Zhang (2004), Photosynthetic pathways of plants grown in alpineand cold regions in the East Qinghai–Tibet Plateau based on stable carbon isotope values, ActaBot. Boreali-Occident. Sin., 24, 1052–1056.
Linder, S. (1985), Potential and actual production in Australian forest stands, in Research forForest Management, edited by J. J. Landsberg and W. Parson, pp. 11–51, CSIRO, Melbourne,Australia.
Lindroth, A. (1993), Aerodynamic and canopy resistance of short-rotation forest in relation toleaf area index and climate, Boundary Layer Meteorol., 66, 265–279.
Lomolino, M. V. (1989), Interpretations and comparisons of constants in the species-arearelationship: An additional caution, Am. Nat., 133, 277–278.
Lovelock, J. E. (1986), Geophysiology: A new look at Earth science, Bull. Am. Meteorol. Soc.,67, 392–397.
Ludlow, M. M., and P. G. Jarvis (1971), Photosynthesis in Sitka spruce: I. General character-istics, J. Appl. Ecol., 8, 925–953.
MacArthur, R. H. (1972), Geographical Ecology, 269 pp., Princeton Univ. Press, Princeton,N. J.
Martın, H. G., and N. Goldenfeld (2006), On the origin and robustness of power-law species-area relationships in ecology, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U. S. A., 103, 10,310–10,315.
Marshall, C. R. (2007), Explaining latitudinal diversity gradients, Science, 317, 451–452.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-BIB AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 17:35
B I B L I O G R A P H Y 145
Monsi, M., and T. Saeki (1953), Uber den Lichtfaktor in den Pflanzengesellschaften und seineBedeutung fur die Stoffproduktion, Jpn. J. Bot., 14, 22–52.
Monteith, J. L. (1963), Gas exchange in plant communities, in Environmental Control of PlantGrowth, edited by L. T. Evans, pp. 95–112, Academic Press, New York.
Monteith, J. L. (1973), Principles of Environmental Physics, 241 pp., American Elsevier, NewYork.
Monteith, J. L. (1977), Climate and the efficiency of crop production in Britain, Philos. Trans.R. Soc. London, Ser. B, 281, 277–294.
Mosteller, F., R. E. K. Rourke, and G. B. Thomas Jr. (1961), Probability and Statistics, 395 pp.,Addison-Wesley, Reading, Mass.
Muller, D. (1928), Die Kohlensaureassimilation bei arktischen Pflanzen und die Abhangigkeitder Assimilation von der Temperatur, Planta, 6, 22–39.
Peixoto, J. P., and A. H. Oort (1992), Physics of Climate, 520 pp., Am. Inst. of Phys., NewYork.
Penning de Vries, F. W. T., A. H. M. Brunsting, and A. H. van Laar (1974), Products, re-quirements and efficiency of biosynthesis, a quantitative approach, J. Theoret. Biol., 45, 339–377.
Pickett, S. T. A., and P. S. White (eds.) (1985), The Ecology of Natural Disturbance and PatchDynamics, 472 pp., Academic Press, New York.
Pinker, R. T., and I. Laszlo (1992), Modeling surface solar irradiance for satellite applicationson a global scale, J. Appl. Meteorol., 31, 194–211.
Rapoport, E. H. (1975), Areografia: estrategias geograficas de las especies, Fondo de Cul-tura Economica, Mexico City (English translation by B. Drausal, Areography: GeographicalStrategies of Species, Pergamon, New York, 1982.)
Rauner, J. L. (1976), Deciduous forests, in Vegetation and the Atmosphere, vol. 2, Case Studies,edited by J. L. Monteith, pp. 241–264, Academic Press, New York.
Reid, W. V., and K. R. Miller (1989), Keeping Options Alive: The Scientific Basis for ConservingBiodiversity, World Resour. Inst., Washington, D. C.
Rodrıguez-Iturbe, I., and A. Rinaldo (1997), Fractal River Basins: Chance and Self-Organization, 547 pp., Cambridge Univ. Press, Cambridge, U. K.
Ross, J. (1975), Radiative transfer in plant communities, in Vegetation and the Atmosphere,vol. 1, Principles, edited by J. L. Monteith, pp. 13–55, Academic Press, New York.
Ross, J. (1981), The Radiation Regime and Architecture of Plant Stands, Dr. W. Junk, TheHague.
Rosswall, T., and O. W. Heal (Eds.) (1975), Structure and function of tundra ecosystems, Ecol.Bull. 20, Swedish Nat. Sci. Res. Counc., Stockholm.
Roy, J. (2001), How does biodiversity control primary productivity? in Terrestrial GlobalProductivity, edited by J. Roy, B. Saugier, and H. A. Mooney, pp. 169–188, Academic Press,New York.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-BIB AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 17:35
146 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
Ruimy, A., B. Saugier, and G. Dedieu (1994), Methodology for the estimation of terrestrial netprimary production from remotely sensed data, J. Geophys. Res., 99, 5263–5283.
Scheiner, S. M., and J. M. Rey-Benayas (1994), Global patterns of plant diversity, Evol. Ecol.,8, 331–347.
Schluter, D., and J. Weir (2007), Response to C. R. Marshall, Science, 317, 452–453.
Stevens, G. C. (1989), The latitudinal gradient in geographical range: How so many speciescoexist in the tropics, Am. Nat., 133, 240–256.
Strahler, A. N. (1971), The Earth Sciences, 2nd ed., Harper and Row, New York.
Svenning, J.-C., and R. Condit (2008), Biodiversity in a warmer world, Science, 322, 206–207.
Thom, A. S. (1975), Momentum, mass and heat exchange of plant communities, in Vegetationand the Atmosphere, vol. 1, Principles, edited by J. L. Monteith, pp. 57–109, Academic Press,New York.
Tilman, D. (1982), Resource Competition and Community Structure, Monogr. Popul. Biol.,vol. 17, 296 pp., Princeton Univ. Press, Princeton, N. J.
Tilman, D. (1988), Plant Strategies and the Dynamics and Structure of Plant Communities,Monogr. Popul. Biol., vol. 26, 360 pp., Princeton Univ. Press, Princeton, N. J.
Todorovic, P. (1968), A mathematical study of precipitation phenomena, Rep. CER 67-68PT65,Eng. Res. Cent., Colo. State Univ., Fort Collins.
Trewartha, G. T. (1954), An Introduction to Climate, 3rd ed., 402 pp., McGraw-Hill, NewYork.
U.S. National Weather Service (1974), Normals, means, and extremes—1974, Climatol. Bull.,48–55.
Wallace, A. R. (1878), Tropical Nature and Other Essays, Macmillan, London.
Weir, J. T., and D. Schluter (2007), The latitudinal gradient in recent speciation and extinctionrates of birds and mammals, Science, 317, 1574.
West, G. B., and J. H. Brown (2004), Life’s universal scaling laws, Phys. Today, 57(9), 36–42.
West, G. B., J. H. Brown, and B. J. Enquist (1997), A general model for the origin of allometricscaling laws in biology, Science, 276, 112–116.
White, A., P. Handler, and E. Smith (1968), Principles of Biochemistry, McGraw-Hill, NewYork.
Williamson, M. (1988), Relationship of species number to area, distance and other variables,in Analytical Biogeography, edited by A. A. Myers and P. S. Giller, pp. 91–115, Chapman andHall, New York.
Wilson, E. O. (1965), The challenge from related species, in The Genetics of ColonizingSpecies, edited by H. G. Baker and G. L. Stebbins, pp. 7–27, Academic Press, New York.
Wilson, E. O. (1992), The Diversity of Life, 424 pp., Belknap Press, Cambridge, Mass.
Wilson, E. O. (1999), Consilience: The Unity of Knowledge, 367 pp., A. A. Knopf, New York.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-BIB AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 17:35
B I B L I O G R A P H Y 147
Woodward, F. I. (1987), Climate and Plant Distribution, 174 pp., Cambridge Univ. Press, NewYork.
World Resources Institute/International Institute for Environmental Development (WRI/IIED)(1988), World Resources 1988–1989, Basic Books, New York.
Wright, D. H. (1983), Species-energy theory: An extension of species-area theory, Oikos, 41,496–506.
Additional Reading
These additional references were pointed out to the author by an anonymous reviewer after themanuscript had gone to bed.
Gaston, K. J. (2003), The Structure and Dynamics of Geographic Ranges, 266 pp., OxfordUniv. Press, New York.
Hawkins, B. A., et al. (2003), Energy, water, and broad-scale patterns of species richness,Ecology, 84, 3105–3117.
Kraft, H., and W. Jetz (2007), Global patterns and determinants of vascular plant diversity,Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U. S. A., 104, 5925–5930.
Weiser, M. D., et al. (2007), Latitudinal patterns of range size and species richness of NewWorld woody plants, Global Ecol. Biogeogr., 16, 679–688.
Willig, M. R., D. M. Kaufman, and R. D. Stevens (2003), Latitudinal gradients of biodiversity:Pattern, process, scale and synthesis, Annu. Rev. Ecol. Evol. System., 34, 273–309.
P1: JZZ Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-BIB AGU001/Eagleson December 15, 2009 17:35
B I B L I O G R A P H Y 147
Woodward, F. I. (1987), Climate and Plant Distribution, 174 pp., Cambridge Univ. Press, NewYork.
World Resources Institute/International Institute for Environmental Development (WRI/IIED)(1988), World Resources 1988–1989, Basic Books, New York.
Wright, D. H. (1983), Species-energy theory: An extension of species-area theory, Oikos, 41,496–506.
Additional Reading
These additional references were pointed out to the author by an anonymous reviewer after themanuscript had gone to bed.
Gaston, K. J. (2003), The Structure and Dynamics of Geographic Ranges, 266 pp., OxfordUniv. Press, New York.
Hawkins, B. A., et al. (2003), Energy, water, and broad-scale patterns of species richness,Ecology, 84, 3105–3117.
Kraft, H., and W. Jetz (2007), Global patterns and determinants of vascular plant diversity,Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U. S. A., 104, 5925–5930.
Weiser, M. D., et al. (2007), Latitudinal patterns of range size and species richness of NewWorld woody plants, Global Ecol. Biogeogr., 16, 679–688.
Willig, M. R., D. M. Kaufman, and R. D. Stevens (2003), Latitudinal gradients of biodiversity:Pattern, process, scale and synthesis, Annu. Rev. Ecol. Evol. System., 34, 273–309.
Author Index
Allen, L.H., 106
Anderson, P.W, 7, 15
Bailey, R.G., 19,20,67
Baker, ES., 106, 123
Benjamin, IR, xvii, 9, 10, 11,28,36,40,
42,68,74,75,76,78,124
Berliand, I.G., 50
Bird, RB., 64
Birkebak, R, 106
Bjorkman, IE, 123
Bonan, G.B., 8
Brockman, C.E, xiv, 4, 13,29,31,37,39-40,
42,43,45,46,49,52,54,57,60,89-91
Brown,IH., 1,7,17,83,141
Brown, IR., 142
Cannell, M.G.R, 106
Caro, R, 80
Carpenter, S.R, xv, 5, 69
CerIing, I.E., xv, 6
Clark, WS., 106
Condit, R., 3, 31
Connor, E.F., 71
Cornell, c.A., xvii, 9, 10, 11,28,36,40,42,
68, 74, 75, 76, 78, 124
Cox, D.R., 75
Currie, DJ., 4, 69
Davis, S.D., 70, 71, 72, 73, 79, 81, 82, 84, 93
Decker, IP., 106
deLaubenfe1s, 58, 59
Eagleson, P.S., xv, 9, 14,34,35,66,67, 73,
80,81,87,92,97, 104, 105, 106, 107,
111, 112, 113, 115, 122, 123, 124
Ehleringer, I, xv, 6, 106
Eldredge, N., xv, 118
EI-Hemry, 1.1., 80
Enquist, B.1., 4, 70, 79, 125
Entekhabi, D., 24, 28,40,41,43,44,45,46,
50,55,56,57,78
Fischer, A.G., 4, 69
Gates, D.M., 97, 101, 122
Gentry, A.H., 4, 13, 14,70, 71, 79, 91, 93
Gibson, A.c., 137
Goldenfeld, N., 70, 71 .
Gosse, G.C., 106
Gould, S.I, xv, 118
Harte, I, 1,7
Hawk, K.L., 80, 81
Heal, O.W, 67
Holmgren, P., 123, 124
Hom, H.S., 7, 17,97,98
149
150 RANGE AND RICHNESS OF VASCULAR LAND PLANTS
Hubbell, S.P., 5, 12,63, 84, 92, 140
Huston, M.A., 5, 6, 10, 13,69, 70, 71, 72,
83,91
Jar vis, P.G., 106, 107
Keely, IE., 6
Kodric-Brown, A., 83
Komer, c.R., 119
Kozlowski, T.T., 106
Kraft, N.J.B., 12, 14,63,93
Kramer, P.I, 106
Kussell, E., 72
Landsberg, J.J., 106
Larcher, W, 14,66,67,69,92,98, 104, 113,
116, 120
Laszlo, I., 21, 73
Legg, B., 101
Leibler, S., 72
Lemon, E.R., 106
Lewis, P.A.W, 75
Li,M.,6
Linder, S., 106
Lindroth, A., 106
Lomolino, M.V., 71
Lovelock, IE., 95
Ludlow, M.M., 107
MacArthur, R.H., 7
Marshall, c.R., 69
Martin, H.G., 70, 71
McCoy, E.D., 71
Miller, K.R., xv, 13,70, 71, 79, 82, 83, 91,
93
Monsi, M., 113-115
Monteith, IL., 97, 101, 106, 113
Mosteller, E, 42
Miiller, D., 106
Niklas, I, 4, 70, 80, 125
Oort, A.H., 49, 50, 51
Paquin, v., 4, 69
Peixoto, IP., 49, 50, 51
Penning de Vries, EWT., 106, 122
Pickett, S. T.A., xiv, 72
Pinker, R.T., 21, 73
Rapoport, E., xv, 3, 92
Rauner, IL., 123
Reid, Wv., xv, 13, 70, 71, 79, 82, 83, 91, 93
Rey-Benayas, 1M., 5, 69
Rinaldo, A., 70
Rodriguez-lturbe, I., 70
Ross, I, 106, 111
Rosswall, T., 67
Roy, I, 4
Ruimy, A.B., 106
Saeki, T., 113-115
Scheiner, S.M., 5, 69
Schluter, D., 69
Stevens, G.C., xv, 3, 4, 7,14,31,69,83,84,
93, 141
Strahler, A.N., 48, 49, 52
Strokina, L.A., 50
Svenning, I-C., 3, 31
Thorn, A.S., 101
Tilman, D., 7,14
Todorov ic, P., 73
Trewartha, G.T., 19,21
Wallace, A.R., 4, 69
Weir, I, 69
West, G.B., 1,7,17,70
W hite, P.S., xiv, 72, 97
Williamson, M., 71
Wilson, E.o., xv, 5, 7, 69, 83, 85
Woodward, EI., 3
Wright, D.H., 4
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-SIN AGU001/Eagleson December 17, 2009 0:44
Subject Index
Acacia craspedocarpa, 66annual land surface, 23–24arctic willow, 106arrival process, 92assimilated carbon, 122assimilation modulation, 104atmospheric temperature, latitudinal
distribution of, 66autumnal equinox, 49
bioclimatic basis, for local communitystructure, 7–8
bioclimatic control, high-latitude shift in,65–68
bioclimatic dispersion, 63–65southward latitudinal, 64
bioclimatic function, 33, 88–89at canopy scale, 117–118one-to-one, 45for primary canopies, 62species-controlling, 125Taylor expansion of, 34Taylor series approximation to,
9univariate, 108–110zeroth-order, 11
biodiversity, 5biological transformation, of local
distributions, 36
biomeslatitudinal boundaries of, 20of North America, 19
C3 leafassimilation modulation, 104biochemical structure of, 98Darwinian operating state, 107–108idealized geometry of, 111–113optically optimal geometry, 112photosynthetic capacity of, 97–99,
104–105potential assimilation efficiency of,
105–107structure of, 102
C3 species, 6, 8, 9canopy, 111–121cloud-supporting events, 74, 78–79common saturating property of, 99distribution, 32, 75–77germination, 79–80in growing season, 75–77intercepted in growing season, 77–78modal local, 38parameters of, 106, 116restriction, 84stress-constrained local distribution of,
37supporting radiation, 75–77
151
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-SIN AGU001/Eagleson December 17, 2009 0:44
152 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
C4 pathway, 6CAM pathway, 6Canadian Climate Program, 67canopy resistances, 123–125
interleaf, 100canopy scale, 117–118
evolutionary equilibrium, 121–122carbon, 122
supply evidence, 123chloroplasts, 99–104climate, 87climate variability, 69climate zonal homogeneity, 28climatic assimilation potential, see potential
assimilation efficiencyclimatic disturbance, 79–80climatic forcing
analytical summary for, 43–45theoretical estimation of range with,
36–39closed canopy, 113–116CO2, 8
ambient concentrations, 97, 104assimilation rates, 97flux resistance, 100intercellular concentration, 102
cold pulse, 92common saturating property, 99complete distribution, 40continuous distribution, 72–73convective variability, see spatial variabilitycovariance, 41creosote bush, 106
Darwinian heat proposition, 113Davis curve, 72density functions, 76
dimensionless, 77probability, 88
derived distributions, 9dimensionless density function, 77dimensionless Schmidt number, 64discontinuous local modal species,
62discontinuous range, 62discrete distribution, 72–73
dispersion of species, 63–65distribution
C3 species, 33, 37, 75–77complete, 40continuous, 72–73derived, 9discrete, 72–73gamma, 76–77, 81geographic, 5latitudinal, 48, 52, 58, 62, 66local, 36, 37local species, 34–35, 37, 42–43, 72–73one-sided, 8Poisson, 75single-sided, 40stress-constrained local, 37
dry-atmosphere latitudes, 52
equinoctial average growing season, 89European beach, 106evolutionary equilibrium, 11, 88
at canopy scale, 121–122carbon supply evidence, 123at leaf scale, 121local, 118–120
Fick’s law, 101flux-gradient relationship, 101free atmosphere, 99–104free stream velocity, 123functional types, 6
gamma distribution, 76–77shape factor, 81
gamma function shape factor, 80Gedankenexperiment, 49, 50geographic distribution, 3GISS, see NASA-Goddard Institute for
Space Studiesglobal pixel SW flux, 50global zonal average, 21
of annual land surface, 23–24of daytime average SW flux, 26of latitudinal gradient, 27of meridional gradients, 26of observed pixel climate, 24, 28
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-SIN AGU001/Eagleson December 17, 2009 0:44
S U B J E C T I N D E X 153
seasonal canopy-top, 23of standard deviation, 23–24, 25
global zonal standard deviation, 25, 26gradient estimation
latitudinal distribution of local species,61
of range, 52–55, 60–62growing seasons, 10
C3 species in, 75–77C3 species-supporting radiation
intercepted in, 77–78estimated, 21, 24local climate, 19
heat, 65–68heating-cooling cycles, 72high-latitude shift, 65–68historical summary, 1–3homogeneity scaling, 71homogeneous C3 canopy, 111–121homogeneous crown, 114
idealized geometry, 111–113idealized local time series, 74instability, 87interannual variability, 9interleaf canopy resistance, 100International Satellite Cloud Climatology
Project (ISCCP), 21, 40land-only pixels in zonal band from,
22intertropical convergence, 84ISCCP, see International Satellite Cloud
Climatology Projectisotropic atmosphere, SW flux for, 49–51
land-only pixels, 21number of, 24in zonal band, 22
latitudinal boundaries, of biomes, 20latitudinal distribution
of atmospheric temperature, 66of mean latitudinal range of local
species, 31–68latitudinal envelopes, of observed plant
richness, 70
latitudinal gradient, 3–4, 69global zonal average of, 27
latitudinal rangeestimation of, 56of local modal species, 47, 48, 52, 56
latitudinal variationof gamma distribution shape factor, 81of local species richness, 83
leaf resistances, 123–125leaf scale, 108–110, 121least squares, 48light, 65–68light saturated systems, 103loblolly pine, 106local area, 70–71local canopy scale, 121–122local climate, 19–29
growing seasons, 19major biomes, 19variations in, 36
local community structure, bioclimatic basisfor, 7–8
local distributionsbiological transformation of, 36stress-constrained, 37
local evolutionary equilibrium, 118–120local modal species
C3, 38discontinuous, 62latitudinal range of, 47, 48, 52, 56range of, 39–41, 51–52
local richness, maximum envelope of, 70local species
bioclimatic dispersion of, 63–65continuous distribution of, 72–73discrete distribution of, 72–73frequency of distribution of, 37latitudinal variation of, 83mean latitudinal range of, 31–68mean of ranges of, 39–41modal, 39–41, 47, 48, 52, 56, 62observed, 42–43piecewise latitudinal linearization of, 57probability mass of distribution of
observed, 42–43range of, 32–36
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-SIN AGU001/Eagleson December 17, 2009 0:44
154 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
local species (cont.)richness of, 69–84standard deviations, 38
local variability, see point variabilitylow-latitude smoothing, 62–63low-moisture atmosphere, 49–50lumped canopy, 118
major simplifications, 15mass diffusivity, 101mass flux density, 101mass transfer, 99–104maxima of SW flux, 51–52mean latitudinal range
definition, 31–32of local species, 31–68
mean point values, 53meridional gradients, global zonal average
of, 26Michaelis-Menten equation, 97–99, 104Millennium Ecosystem Assessment, 5minima of SW flux, 51–52modal local C3 species, constrained range of,
38modal species, range of, 51–52, see also
local modal speciesmodeling philosophy, 5–7moist forests, 28Monsi-Saeki extinction equation, 115multicultural symbiosis, 15multiple forcing variables, 68
NASA-Goddard Institute for Space Studies(GISS), 21, 40, 43, 56
land-only pixels in zonal band from, 22normalized fluctuation around zonal
mean, 44satellite data set, 45
neutral theory, 12, 91nighttime respiration, 98nitrogen, 12–13normalized fluctuation, around zonal mean,
44, 55
observed local species, probability mass ofdistribution of, 42–43
observed pixel annual shortwavefluctuations, 55
observed richness, 82–84off-mode species, 89Ohm’s law, 101one-sided distribution, 8optimally supported species, 9–10
parameter estimation, 80–81percentage mass, 42photosynthetic behaviors, 6
of C3 leaf, 97–99, 104–105piecewise latitudinal linearization, 46
of components of local species range,57
Pinus cembra, 66pixel climate, see local climatepoint rainfall, 73point variability, 65point-by-point estimation, 45–49, 91
first method, 46of latitudinal distribution of local species
range, 58of range, 45–49, 55–60second method, 46–48
Poisson distribution, 75Poisson probability mass function, 81potential assimilation efficiency, 35
of C3 leaf, 105–107potential richness, 82–84power laws, 70primary canopies, bioclimatic function,
62principal assumptions, 15principal findings, 15probability density function, 88probability mass, of observed local species,
42–43
range, 9–13bioclimatic dispersion and, 63–65discontinuous, 62extension of forecasts, 68gradient estimation of, 52–55, 60–62idealized, of mean local species, 12latitudinal, 47, 48, 52, 56
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-SIN AGU001/Eagleson December 17, 2009 0:44
S U B J E C T I N D E X 155
of local mean species, 32–36, 39–41, 58,61
of local modal species, 39–41, 51–52low-latitude smoothing of, 62–63observation, 45–49point-by-point estimation of, 45–49,
55–60richness and, 84theoretical estimation of, 36–39of vascular land plants, 91
Rapoport’s rule, 3, 5rectangular pulse, 73red oak, 106reductionism, 85resistances
canopy, 123–125CO2 flux, 100interleaf canopy, 100leaf, 123–125
Reynolds number, 65richness, 14
gradient, 5local, 70local species, 69–84observed plant, 70potential v. observed, 82–84range and, 84of vascular land plants, 91zonal, 14
saturation mechanisms, 35scaling, 70
homogeneity, 71short dashes, 48shortwave radiative flux, 8, 16single-sided distribution, 40Sitka spruce, 106, 107solar radiation, 20–27southward latitudinal bioclimatic dispersion,
64spatial variability, 64species-area relationship, 70–71species-controlling bioclimatic function, 125species-supporting cloud events, 74stationary Poisson stochastic process, SW
flux as, 73–75
stoichiometry, 122stomatal control circuit, 102–103stress, 107stress-constrained local distribution, 37stressing, 73SW flux, 88, 102
astronomical, 78climatic forcing by, 36–39, 43–45disturbance pairs, 81estimation of, 59global pixel, 50instantaneous, 92in isotropic atmosphere, 49–51local maximum in, 59local minimum in, 58maxima, 51–52minima, 51–52seasonal average, 115–116seasonal canopy-top, 74as stationary Poisson stochastic process,
73–75
Taylor expansion, 37bioclimatic function, 34
Taylor series approximation, 36bioclimatic function of, 9
top-of-the-atmosphere SW flux, 27trees, 3–4Trewartha, 19tropical forest dynamics, 63tropical preeminence, 5
univariate bioclimatic function, 108–110univariate state equation, 125
variabilitypoint, 65spatial, 65
vascular land plants, 91vertical flux of radiation, 113–116von Karman’s constant, 123
warm pulse, 92water, 12–13wavelike oscillations, 45white oak, 106
P1: JZP Trim: 7in × 10in Top: 42.5pt Gutter: 78ptAGUB001-SIN AGU001/Eagleson December 17, 2009 0:44
156 R A N G E A N D R I C H N E S S O F V A S C U L A R L A N D P L A N T S
zeroth-order, 7, 8bioclimatic function, 11estimate of local species distribution,
34–35zonal average species, 32zonal bands, 31
zonal climate, 41zonal homogeneity, 27–29
climate, 28zonal mean, normalized fluctuation around,
44, 55zonal richness, 14